Home | Register Login | Wanted Manuals | MarketPlace | Members Area | Manuals Manufacturer Directory | UPC Lookup | Information Pages | Policy


Back To Harman Kardon Receiver       Model: AVR 435 Harman Kardon Audio Video Receiver AVR 435
Regular Text Search or Search by Model Number

Register / log-in to add to your Hammerwall Collection.
Manual Location


This is a partial text extraction from the pdf, to download the pdf, click the Manual tab. If you want to search this text, hold control and F, and type the word you are looking for.

Page: 1

harman / kardon _ Power for the r ) _ gita ] Revo ] ution _ AVR 435 AUDIO / VIDEO RECEIVER OWNER'S MANUAL AV _ • _ ! H L _ a { • _ L _ IC2 _ iiii iiiii iiiii _ iiii i _ ii iii _ i ii _ iiiiiii iiiii _ iii i _ iii iiii i _ ii i [ iii , : • i , 2 ao _ r _ cb [ [ 1 !
Page: 2

AVR 435 AUDIO / VIDEO RECEIVER 3 Introduction ForCanadianmodel CAUTmON 4 ImportanSt atetyInformation 4 Unpacking 5 FrontPaneCl ontrols 8 Rear - PanCelonnections CAUTION : To prevent electric shock , 11 MainRemoteControFl unctions do not use this ( polarized ) 15 ZoneIIRemoteControFl uncl _ ons plug with an extension cord , receptacle or other outlet 16 InstaBtionandConnections ModMepourlosCanadien unless the blades can 19 SystemConfiguration be fully inserted to 19 SpeakePr lacement prevent blade exposure . 19 SystemSetup within anequilateral tdai'gle , is inter , deal to 20 InputSetup alert the user to the p esence of unins _ lated , l _ The llghtning Ilash wilh arrowhead symbol , _ dangerous voltage " within the product's 21 AudioSetup enclosure that may be of surf clen [ magn tude to constitute a dsk of electric shock to persons . 22 SurroundSetup 23 UsingEzSet / EQ _ angle is _ , tended to ale _ tthe se _ to the , _ prheeseen × ccleamaoi _ f oinmpolplaoinntt owpitehirnatinagn eaqi _ uidlateral 26 ManuaSl etup maintenance ( servicing ) instluctions n the literature accompanying the appliance , 26 SpeakeSr etup 28 SpeakeCr rossoveSretting 28 DelaySettings 29 OutputLeveAl qustment 32 Operation 32 BasicOperation 32 SourceSebction 32 VolumeandToneControl 33 SurroundModeSelection 33 DigitaAl udioPlayback 34 SurroundModeChart 37 TunerOperation 37 Recording 38 OutputLeveTl rimAdjustment 38 DimFunction 39 AdvancedFeatures 39 FrontPaneDl isplayRade 39 DisplayBrightness 39 TurnOnVolumeLevel 39 SemiOSDSettings TypographicalConventions 40 FullOSDTimeOutAdjustment Ino _ derto helpyouusethismanuawl iththeremotecontrol , fronbpaneclontrolsandrear - paneclonnections , 40 DigitaAl utoPollSettings certainconvenl _ onhsavebeenused . 41 MulllroomOperation 41 MultiroomSetup EXAMPLE ( boldtype ) indicatesa specificremotecontrool r front - paneblutton , or reappanel 41 SurroundChanneAl mplifbrAssignment connectiojnack 42 MultiroomOperaSon E XA II P L E - ( OCRtype ) indicatesa messagtehatis visibleon - screenor onthefrontpanel 43 ConfigurintgheRemote informatiodnisplay 43 PrepmgrammeCdodeEntry 44 AutomaticCodeEntry EXRNPLE ( Synchrotype ) indicatesa messagethatis displayedontheremotecontrol'sLCDscreen 44 LearningCommands 45 LearningCodestoranInputSelector [ ] ( numbeirna squale ) indicatesa specificfront - paneclonhol 46 ChangingDevices [ ] ( letterina square ) indicatesafront - paneclontrotlhatis normallyconcealedbehindthedropdowndoor 46 MacroProgramming 48 PunchThroughConfigurahon 0 ( numbeirna circle ) indicatesa reappaneclonnection 50 Renaming _ ) ( numbeirnanoval ) indicatesa buttonorindicatorontheremote 51 Resettintghe Remote 52 DevicePriorityTming Q ( letterin anoval ) indicatesa buttonontheZoneIIremote 52 BacklighOt ptions 54 T _ oubleshootiGnguide 54 ProcessoRr eset Theappearanceofthetextorcursortoryourreceiver'sonscreenmenusmayvaryslightlyfromthe illustrationinsthismanualW . hethetrhetextappearsinalluppercaseor upper - andlowercasecharacters , 55 TechnicaSlpecifications 56 Index petlormanceandopeTatiornemainthesame , Seetrademarkacknowledgemenotsn page55
Page: 3

INTRODUCTION ThankYoufor ChoosingHarmanKardon ® In tandemwithEzSeVEQth , eAVR435 includes • All populardigital and matrix surroundmodes , a fullsetof manuaclonfiguratiosnettingsfor those includingDolby * Digital , DolhyDigitalEX , Withthepumhaseof a HarmanKa _ doAnVR435 , you whowishto custom - trimtheirsystemevenfurtheT . DolhyProLogic * IIx , DTS ? DTS - ES ® Discrete areaboutto beginmanyyearsof listeningenjoyment A QuadrupleCrossovebrassmanagemenstystem and Matrix , DTSNeo : 6 ® and DTS96 / 24 TheAVR435 hasa widerangeof fealsresand makesit possibleto enterdifferenctrossovesrettings • Sevenchannelsof high - current , ultrawide - optionsthataccommodatveirtuallaynycombination foreachspeakergroup . bandwidthamplificationwith the surround of speakersr , oomsizeandprogramsourcesI . tis backchannelsassignableto eithermain room Videoconnectionasndsysteminteg _ afioinsa snap as easyto operateas itis to setup , butinorderto or remoteroomuse withthe , _ VR435 , thanksto threeassignablew , ide takemaximumadvantageof themanyadvanced • HarmanKardon'sexclusiveLogic7 ® processing , bandwidthinputsthatamrenameableT . ofurther technologiewsithinyournewAVR , itis strongly along with DolhyVirtual Speakerprocessing enhancetheviewingexperiencewithdigitalsourcesor recommendetdhatyoutakea fewminutesto read for usewhen onlytwo speakersare available displayst , heAVR435 ' s A / VSyncDelayfeatureallows thisowner'smanual . • DolhyHeadphoneto createspacious , open youto compensatfeortt _ elossof lipsyncdueto digi If youhaveanyquestionasboutthisproduct , itsinstal - sound fields when using headphones talvideodelaysindividuallfyor eachinput . FulEcarrier lafionoritsoperationw , e recommendthatyoucontact IRoutputsa , bi directionaRl S232 portanda learning • High - bandwidth , HDTV - compatiblecomponent yourdealeror installe _ a , stheyareyourbestsource remotewitha two linedisplayareamongthemany videoinputsmaybe assignedto anyvideoinput of localinformationY . oumayalsoaccessawealthof otherfeaturesthatmaketheAVR435 ' s powersimple • HarmanKardon'sadvancedEzSet / EQTM auto - informatioanndassistancbey visitingourWebsite to use . maticallyconfiguresspeakersettingsand sets at wwwharmankafdon . com . roomequalizationfor quick , easyandaccu - TheAVR435 ' s multizoneopfionsanda standard DescriptionandFeatures rate systemsetup ZoneIIremoteconl _ oml akeitpossibleto listento TheAVR435 isdesignedto serveasthehubof your a separatesourceina roomwhilethemainhome • Full bassmanagement , includingQuadruple homeentertainmenstystemc , ombiningtheflexibility theaterusesa differenstourceW . ithassignablreear Crossoverand individualsettingsfor each input to accessthewiderangeofaudioandvideosource surroundchanneal mplifiersy , oumaycreatea basic optionsavailabletodaywiththepowerto handlevirtu remotelisteningzonewithouat nyadditionael quip • A / VSync delayadjustablefor eachinput allyanytypeof programmateriaolr surroundmode . ment . Foronewiremultimomconnectivittyh , e delivers perfect lip syncwith digital programs Thanksto a stateof - theartDA610digitasl ignal AVR435 is A - BUSRead _ y , " requiringonlya single or video displays processofrromTexasInstrumentsth , eAVR435 offers Category5 / 5e cableandanoptionarlemotemodule • ExtensiveMultiroomoptions , includinga precisiondecodingofallcurrentlyavailabletechnolo to powerremotespeakerswhilecontiollingvolume standardZoneII remote , assignablerear - giesfromDolbyLaboratorieasndDTS _ . Inaddition , andenablingfullcon _ olovertheprogramsourceand channelamplifier channelsandA - BUSReady _ olderanalogandtwo channepl rogramsourcesbenefit compatibleIRcontrolleddevicesT . heunit'sMulfiroom capabilityfor listeningto a separatesourcein fromthelatestversionof HarmanInternafional's outputsmayalsobeusedto feedanoptionale , xternal a remotezone Logic7 _ ' processinwghichcreatesa widel , more poweramplifiear ndvolumecontrol . envelopinsgoundfieldwithmored , efinedchannel TheAVR435 ' s sevenchanneal mplifieris ourtime positioninagndtheabilityto create7 . 1 soundfields honoredhighcurrent , ultrawide - bandwiddtehsignwith from5 . 1 sourcesA . dditionapl rocessinagnddecoding thepowerto reproducetheloudesct rescendosor optionsincludeMP3 , Dolby * Virtuasl peakerandDolby cinemasoundeffectswhileremainingvirtuallyfree Headphoneprocessing . fromdistortionor systemnoise . An importanatdditionto theAVR435 ' s impressivelist Combiningstateof - theart circuitryd , igitatlechnology of featuresis EzSet / EQwThichautomatetsheconfigu - andprovenpertormancweithanelegandt esignthatis rationprocessto makeit quickere , asiear ndmore , compatiblewiththelatestsourcecomponentasnd preciseU , singthespeciaml icrophonesuppliedwith videodisplayst , heAVR435 representtsheculmina - theunit , EzSeVEQtakestheguessworokutof entering tionof HarmanKardon'sfiR / yearhistoryof delivering speaker " size " andcrossoveirnformationd , elaytimes thefinestsonicperformance . for allchannelsandoutputlevelsI . naddifionto the configuratiosnettingsE , zSeVEaQlsoincludesroom equalizalonsothatthesignalssentto eachspeaker amtailoredto provideaccuratesonicqualitywithyour specificcombinationof speakertype , roomsizeand otherfactorsthatinfluenceroomacousticsW . ith EzSeVEQyo , ursystemis customconfiguredina few minuteswithaccuracythatpreviouslryequiredexpen - siveandha _ d - tousetestequipment .
Page: 4

SAFETY INFORMATION InstallationLocation enceto Tadioor televisionreceptionw , hichcanbe Important Safety Information • Toensureproperoperationandto avoidthepoten - determinedbyturningtheequipmenotffandon , the VerifyLineVoltageBeforeUse tialfor safetyhazardsp , lacetheunitona firmand userisencouragedto tryto correcttheinterference YourAVB435 hasbeendesignedfor usewith levelsurfaceW . henplacingtheunitona shelf , be byoneor moreofthefollowingmeasurse : , 120 voltACcurrent . Connectiotno a linevoltage certainthattheshelfandanymountinghardware • Reorienot rrelocatethereceivingantenna . otherthanthatfor whichit is intendedcancreatea cansupporttheweightof theproduct . • Increasetheseparationbetweentheequipment safetyandfirehazardandmaydamagetheunit . • Makecertainthatproperspaceis providedboth andreceive _ . aboveandbelowtheunittorventilationI . fthis Ifyouhaveanyquestionasboutthevoltagerequirements • Connecttheequipmenitntoanoutletona circuit productwillbeinstalledina cabinetor other foryourspecificmodel , oraboutthelinevoltageinyour differenhtornthatto whichthereceiveirsconnected enclosedarea , makecertainthatthereis sufficient areac , ontacyt oursellingdealerbeforepluggingtheunit airmovemenwt ithinthecabinet . Undersomecir • Consultthedealeroranexperiencerdadio _ intoa walloutlet . cumstancesa , fanmayberequired . technicianfor help . • Donotplacetheunitdirecllyona carpeted DoNot UseExtensionCords ThisdevicecomplieswithPart15of theFCCRules . surface . Toavoidsafetyhazardsu , seonlythepowercord Operationissubjecttothefollowingtwoconditions : attachedto yourunit . Wedonotrecommendthat • Avoidinstallatioinn extlemelyhotor coldlocations , ( 1 ) thisdevicemaynotcauseharmfuilnterference , extensionco _ dsbeusedwiththisproductA . swithall or inanareathatis exposedto directsunlighot r and ( 2 ) thisdevicemustacceptinterferencreeceived , electricadlevicesd , onotrunpowercordsunderrugs heatingequipment . includinginterferenctehatmaycauseundesired orcarpetsor placeheavyobjectsonthem . Damaged operation . • Avoidmoistorhumidlocations . powercordsshouldbereplacedimmediatelbyyan • Donotobstructtheventilationslotsonthetopof authorizedservicecenterwitha co _ dmeetingfactory NOTEC : hangeosr modificationmsaycausethis the unit , orplaceobjectsdirectlyoverthem . specifications . unitto failto complywithPart15 oftheFOCRules andmayvoidtheuser'saulhorityto operatethe • Dueto theweightof theAVB435 andtheheat HandletheAC PowerCordGently equipment . generatedbytheamplifierst , hereis theremote Whendisconnectintghe powerco _ dfromanACout possibilitythatthe rubberpaddingonthebottom bt , alwayspulltheplug : neverpullthecord . Uyfoudo Unpacking of theunit'sfeetmayleavemarksoncertain notintendto usetheunitforanyconsiderablleength Thecartonandshippingmaterialsusedb protectyour woodor veneermaterialsU . secautionwhen oftime , disconnecttheplug % m theACoutlet . newreceiverduringshipmenwt erespeciallydesigned placingtheunitonsoftwoodsorothermaterials to cushionitfromshockandvibrahonW . esuggest thatmaybedamagedby heatorheavyobjects . DoNot Openthe Cabinet thatyousavethecartonandpackingmaterialfsor Cleaning Therearenousar - serviceabcbomponentisnsidethis useinshippingifyoumove , or shouldtheunitever Whentheunitgetsdirtyw , ipeitwitha cleans , oft , dry productO . peningthecabinetmaypresenat shock needrepair . cloth . Ifnecessaryw , ipeitwitha softclothdampened hazarda , ndanymodificatiotno theproductwillvoid withmildsoapywatert , henafreshclothwithclean yourguaranteeIf . wateroranymetalobjectsuchas a Tominimizethesizeof thecartoninstoragey , oumay waterW . ipedryimmediatelwyitha drydotb . NEVER paperclip , wireora stapleaccidentalflyailsinsidethe wishto flattenit . Thisis donebycarefullyslittingthe usebenzenea , erosoclleanersth , inne _ a , lcohool rany unit , disconnecittfromtheACpowersourceimmedi tapeseamsonthebottomandcollapsingthecarton . othervolatilecleaningagentD , onotuseabrasivedean ately , andconsulat nauthorizedservicecenter . Othercaidboaldinsallsmaybestoredinthesame ers , astheymaydamagethefinishof metalpartsA . void manne _ P . ackingmaterialsthatcannotbecollapsed sprayinginsecticidneeartheunit . CATVor AntennaGrounding shouldbesavedalongwiththecartonina plasticbag . Ifanoutsideantennaorcablesystemisconnectedto Movingthe Unit thisproduct , becertainthatitis groundedsoasto pro Ifyoudonotwishto savethepackagingmaterials , Beforemovingtheunit , becertainto disconnecat ny videsomeprotectionagainsvtoltagesurgesandstatic pleasenotethatthecartonandothersectionsof the interconnectiocnoldswithothercomponentsa , nd chargesS . ection810 of theNabonaEl lectricaCl ode , shippingprotectionarerecydabb . Pleaserespectthe makecertainthatyoudisconnecttheunitfromthe ANSI / NFPNAo . 70 1984 , providesinformatiownith environmenatnddiscardthosematerialast a local ACoutlet . respectto propergroundinogf he mastandsupporting recyclingcenter . structureg , roundfTogf theleaddnwireto anantenna Important Informationfor the User dischargeunit , sizeof groundingconductorsIo , cabon At thistime , youshouldremovetheprotectiveplastic Thisequipmenhtasbeentestedandfoundto comply ofantennadischargeunit , connectiotno grounding filmfromthefront - panelel ns . Leavingthefilminplace withthelimitsfora ClasaBdigitaldevicep , ursuantto elecl _ odeasndrequirementosf thegrounding willaffecttheperformancoef yourremotecontrol . Part15 of theFCCRulesT . helimitsaredesignedto ebcl _ ode . providereasonablperotectionagainsht armfulinterfer enceina residentiainl stalla _ enT . hisequipmengtener NOTETOCATVSYSTEMINSTALLERT : hisreminder ares , usesandcanradiateradiofrequenceynergyand , is providedto calltheCATV ( CableTV ) system if notinstalledandusedin accordancewiththe installer'asttentionto article820 40 of theNECthat inshuctionsm , aycauseharmfuilnterferencteo radio providesguidelinefsorpropergroundingand , inpar communicationH . owevehthereis noguaranteethat ticulahspecifiesthatthecablegroundshallbecon harmfulinterferencweillnotoccurina particulairnstal nettedto thegroundingsystemof thebuildinga , s lation . Ifthisequipmendtoescauseharmfulinterter closeto thepointof cableentryas possible .
Page: 5

FRONT - PANEL CONTROLS m ; N m AVR ' _ Rr _ N harman / kardon L NOTET : omakeit easierto followtheinstructiontshatreferto thisillustrationa , BrgercopymaybedownloadedfromtheProducSt upportsectionforthisproductat wwwharmankardon . cem , ThefollowingcontrobandindicatorasreavailabloentheAVR435 ' s frontpanel : [ ] Standby / OSnwitch [ ] InputSourceSelector [ ] UpperDisplayLine [ ] SurroundModeGroupSelector [ ] TuningModeSelector [ ] LowerDisplayLine [ ] SurroundModeSelector [ ] Front - PaneOlonttoDl oor [ ] SurroundModeIndicatom [ ] TuningSelector [ ] VolumeControl [ ] RemoteSensoWr indow [ ] InputIndicators [ ] PresetStal _ enSelector [ ] Speaker / ChannIenlputIndicators Thefollowingcontrolsandjacksarelocatedbehindthefront - panedl oor . Toopenthedoo _ p ] lacetheedgeof a fingerontheleftor rightedgeof thepanelandgentlyswingthe doordowntowardsyou . [ ] MainPowerSwitch [ ] DigitaIlnputSelector [ ] Optica4l DigitaIlnput [ ] HeadphonJeack [ ] ToneModeButton [ ] _ / _ . Buttons [ ] Video4 Audio / VideJoacks [ ] SpeakeSr electorButton [ ] ChanneAl djustSelector thatthenameof thedesiredsurroundmodecategory optionsforthesurroundmodecategoryselected . [ ] Standby / OnSwitch : WhentheMainPower Switch [ ] is " ON , p " ressthisbuttonto turnonthe appearsintheon - screendisplayandintheLower Thespecificmodeswillvarybasedonthenumberof AVR435 ; pressitagainto turntheunitoff . Notethat DisplayLine I _ " 1 , presstheSurroundMode speakersavailableth , esurroundmodecategoryand whethertheinputsourceisdigitaloranalogF . orexam theilluminatiosnurroundingtheswitchwillturnblue Selector [ ] to cyclethroughtheindividuaml odes whenf : seunitison . availableF . orexamplep , ressthisbultonto sebctDelby pb , presstheSurroundModeGroupSelector [ ] modesa , ndthenpresstheSurroundModeSelector to selecta categorysuchasDelbyor Logic7 , and [ ] SurroundModeGroupSelector : Pressthisbut [ ] to choosefromthevariousmodeoptions . thenpressthisbuttonto seethespecificmodechoices tonto selectthetop levelgroupof surroundmodes . thatareavailabbF . ormoreinformatioonnmode Eachpressof thebuttonwillselectoneof thesur [ ] SurroundModeSelector : Pressthisbutton selections , eepage34 . to selectfromamongtheavailablseurroundmode roundmodecategoriesO , ncethebuttonis pressedso
Page: 6

FRONT - PANEL CONTROLS receptionis encounteresde , lecttheManuaVMono [ ] TuningSelector : Presstheleftsideof thebutton [ ] Lower DisplayLine : Dependinogntheunit's tuningmodeP . ressandholdagainto switchbackto totunelower - frequencsytationsandtherightsideof statusa , varietyof messageswillappearhere . innor Stereomode . ( Seepage37 formoreintormatioonn thebuttontotunehigher - frequensctyationsW . hen maloperallont , hecun - ensturroundmodewillappear usingtheluner . ) onthisline . thetuneris intheMAN UA L / M0 N 0 mode , eachtapof theSelectorwillincreaseordecreasethe [ ] SurroundModeIndicators : Oneofthese [ ] Front - PaneCl ontrolDoor : Toopenthedoorso frequencbyy oneincrementW . henthetunerreceives indicatorws illlightto showthesurroundmodein thatthefrontpaneljacksandcontrolsbehindthisdoor astro % - enoughsignafloradequatereception , use . Dependinognthespecificcombinallonof input maybeaccessedg , entlypullthedoordownand MA NUA L TU NE D willappearintheLower sourcesandsurroundmodeselectedm , orethan towardsyouusingeitheruppercornerof thedoor . DisplayLine [ ] andintheon - screendisplayW . hen oneindicatomr aylight . ( Seepage34for morn thetuneris intheA UT 0 / STE RE 0 mode , [ ] VolumeControl : Turnthisknobclockwiseto intormation . ) increasethevolume , counterclockwistoedecreasethe pressthebuttononce , andthetunerwillscantora [ ] RemoteSensorWindow : Thesensorbehind staSonwithacceptablesignasl trengthW . henthe volume , IftheAVR435 ismuted , adjustingthevolume thiswindowreceivesinfraredsignalsfloratheremote nexthighero - r Iowepfrequencsytationwitha strong - controwl illautomaticallryeleasetheunitfromthe controlA . imtheremoteat thisareaanddonotblock silencedcondition . enoughsignalistuned , thefrequencsycanwillstop or coveritunlessanexternarlemotesensoris andtheLower DisplayLine [ ] andtheon screen [ ] Input Indicators : Oneof theseindicatorws illlight installed . displaywillindicateA UT 0 TUN ED . Whenan to identitythecurrentlyselectedinput . Notethatthe FMStereostationis tuned , thedisplaywillread enllrelistwilllightbridlyeachtimetheunitis turned AU T 0 ST T UN ED . Seepage37 formore onasa test . informatioonnusingtheluner . [ ] Speaker / ChanneIlnput Indicators : Theseindi [ ] TunerBandSelector : Pressingthisbuttonwill catorsaremulSpu _ posined , icatinbgottsthespeaker automaticalslywitchtheAVR435 to theTunermode , typeselectedforeachchannealndtheincomingdata Pressingit againwillswitchbetweentheAMandFM signacl onfiguralloTnh . eleft , centerr , ight , rightsurround frequencbyands . ( Seepage37 for moreinformation andleftsurroundspeakeirndicatorasrecomposedof onthetuneL ) threeboxesw , hilethesubwoofeirsa singlebox . The centerboxlightswhena " smalls " peakeirs selected , [ ] PresetStationSelector : Pressthisbuttonto andtheb _ voouterboxeslightwhen " large " speakerasre scrollupor downthroughthelistof stationsthathave selectedW . hennoneoftheboxesarelitforthecenter , beenenteredintothepresetmemory . ( Seepage37 surroundorsubwoofecrhannelsn , ospeakehrasbeen formoreinformatioonntunerprogramming . ) assignedthatposi _ on ( . Seepage26 formoreinforma - [ ] Input SourceSelector : Ressthisbuttonto tiononconfigurinsgpeakersT . ) heletlersinsideeach changetheinputby scrolM % upordownthroughthe boxdisplaystheactiveinputchannelsF . orstandard listof inputsources . analoginputso , nlytheL andRwilllight , indicatinag stereoinput , Foradigitasl ourcet , heindicatorwsilllight [ ] TuningModeSelector : Pressthisbuttonto select to displaythechannelbseingreceivedat thedigital Autoor ManuatluningW . henthebuttonis pressedso inputW . hentheleftersflash , thedigitailnputhasbeen thatA UT 0 / g TER E0 appearsintheUpper interrupted ( S . eepage36 formoreinformatioonnthe DisplayLine _ " l _ Jth , etunerwillsearchforthenext ChanneIlndicators . ) stationwithanacceptablseignawl hentheTuning Selector [ ] _ [ _ ispressedW . henthebuttonis [ ] UpperDisplayLine : Dependinogntheunit's pressedsothatMAN UAL / M0 N0 appearsinthe statusa , varietyof messagews illappearhem . In UpperDisplayLine [ ] , eachpressoftheTuning normaloperationth , islinewillshowthecurrentinput Selector [ ] _ willincreastehef _ equenc ( yS . ee sourceandidenlltywhetherananalogor digitailnput page37formoreinformatioonnusingthetuner : T ) his is inuse , Whenthetuneris selectedastheinput , this buttonmayalsobeusedto switchbeb _ veeSntereoand linewillidentifythestaSonasAMor FMandshowthe MonomodesforFMradioreceptionW . henweak frequencayndpresetnumbe _ if , any .
Page: 7

FRONT - PANEL CONTROLS ThefollowingcontrolsandjacksarelocatedbehindthefrontpaneldoorT . oopenthedoor , placetheedgeof a fingerontheleftor rightedgeof thepanelandgentlyswingthe doordowntowardsyou . [ ] Main Power Switch : Pressthisswitchto apply [ ] SpeakerSelectorButton : Pressthisbuttonto [ ] Coaxial4 DigitalInput : Connectthecoaxial powerto theAVR435 , Whentheswitchis pressed begintheprocessof configuringtheAVR435 tor the digitaloutputof a digitaal udioproductsuchasa in , theunitis placedina Standbymode , as indicated typeof speakersit is beingusedwith . Forcompleta poltableaudioplayeror videogameto thisjack . bytheamberilluminatiosnurroundintgheStandby / On informatioonnconfiguringthespeakersettingss , ee [ ] Video4 Jacks : Theseaudio / videjoacksmaybe Switch Ill . ThisbuttonMUSTbepressedinto page26 . usedfortemporaryconnectionto videogamesor operatetheunit . Toturn theunitoffandpreventthe [ ] ChannelAdjustSelector : Pressthebuttonto poltableaudio / videoproductssuchascamcolders useof theremotecontrol , thisswitchshouldbe begintheprocessof adjustingthechannellevelout andportableaudioplayers . presseduntilit popsoutfromthe frontpanelsothat putsusingthesourcecurrentlyplayingthroughyour thewo _ d " OFF " maybereadat thetopof theswitch . AVR . Forcompleteinformatioonnadjustingthechart NOTET : hisswitchis normallyleftinthe " ON " position . neloutputlevel , seepage29 . [ ] HeadphoneJack : Thisjackmaybeusedto lis [ ] DigitalInput Selector : Pressthisbuttonto begin tento theAVR435 ' soutputthrougha pairof head theprocessof selectinga digitasl ourcetot usewith phonesB . e celtainthattheheadphonehsavea stan thecurrentlyselectedinput . Oncethebuttonhasbeen dard1 / 4 " stereophoneplug , orthatyouusean pressedu , sethe ' _ 4 _ " Buttons [ ] to choosethe adaptora , s neededt , o conveittheplugonyourhead - desiredinputandthenpresstheSet Button [ ] to phonesto the1 / 4 " jackusedontheAVRW . henthe enterthesettingintothe unit'smemoryS . eepage33 headphonjeackisin use , themainroomspeakerswill formoreintormafioonndigitalaudio . automaficallbyeturnedoffandtheunitwilloutputa [ ] DelayAdjustSelector : Pressthisbuttonto begin standaldstereosignal . Youmayalsouseoneof the theprocessof adjustingthedelaysettingsfor Dolby DolbyHeadphonemodesforanenhancedlistening surroundmodesS . eepage28 formoreinformation experienceF . ormoreinformatioonnheadphonleis ondelayadjustments . tening , seepage33 . [ ] _ / _ . Buttons : Whenmakingsystemconfi % ra [ ] ToneModeButton : Thisbuttoncontrolsthetone tionchangesusingthefront - paneclontrolsp , ress modesettingse , nablingadjustmenotf thebassand thesebuttonsto scrollthroughtheavailablechoices treblebeesVcuYt . oumayalsouseitto takethetone fortheoptionbeingadjusted . controlsoutof thesignapl athcompletelfyor " flat " responseT , hefirstpressof thebuttondisplaysa [ ] SetButton : Whenmakingsystemconfiguration T 0 NE I10 ] ) E messageintheLower Display changesusingthefrontpanelcontrolsp , ressthisbut - Line [ ] andintheon - screendisplayT . otakethe tonto entera settingintotheunit'smemory . controlsoutof thesignapl ath , presseitherof the [ ] EzSet / EOMicrophoneJack : Befores , taltingthe • _ / 1 _ Buttons [ ] untilthedisplayreadsT 0 N E EzSeVEQautomatedsetupprocessp , lugthe micro 0 U T , Tochangethebassortreblesettingsp , ress phoneintothisjack . Themicrophonedoesnetneed thebuttonagainuntilthedesiredoptionappearsinthe to bepluggedin atothertimes . Lower DisplayLine [ ] andintheonscreendisplay andthenpresseitherof the . _ / _ . Buttons [ ] to [ ] Optical4 DigitalInput : Connecttheopticaldigital enterthedesiredboostor cutsettingS . eepage32 outputofanaudioorvideoproductto thisjack . for moreintormafieonnthetonecontrols .
Page: 8

REAR - PANEL CONNECTIONS ÷ e e ÷ ÷ i t , ie , i , i , i , ei , iiiii Si _ i _ iiiiiiiiii _ i _ iiii _ iiiil iiiii ! iiiiii ! iii - - @ @ I @ . . . I . @ . . _ @ I _ _ _ _ Bi ( o ) I ( < " ® ' ' ° # ® I ® ® I # ® I ® # I _ R ' ° ° ' ° , _ ONITOR I 8CH.DiSEC _ TPUT OPllCAL COAXIAL ANTENNA @ @ @ @ @ 0 @ @ ® 0 AMAntenna Video1 VideoInputs Video1 VideoOutputs CoaxiaDl igitaAl udioInputs Video2 VideoInputs CDAudioInputs Video2 VideoOutputs OpticaDl igitaAl udioOutput _ ) Video3 VideoInputs DVDAudioInputs ComponenVtideoMonitorOutputs TapeInputs FrontSpeakerOutputs DVDComponenVtideoInputs FanVents ComponenVtideo1 Inputs OpticaDl igitaAl udioInputs CenterSpeakeOr utputs ComponenVtideo2 Inputs Video1AudioInputs i _ ) SurroundBack / MultiroomSpeakeOr utputs MultiroomIRInput Video1AudioOutputs RemoteIRInput Video2 AudioInputs , _ RemoteIROutput Video2 AudioOutputs UnswitcheAdCAccessoryOutlet _ " RemoteIRCarrierOutput 8 ChanneDl irectInputs _ ) VideoMonitorOutputs € _ ' RS232 Port _ ) Video3 AudioInputs @ PCoaxiaDl igitaAl udioOutput NOTET : omakeiteasierto followtheinstructiontshatreferto thisilluslTatioan , largercopymaybedownloadedfromtheProducSt upportsectionforthisproductat v _ t _ w . harlnankardon . com . NOTET : oassistin makingthecorrectconnectionfsor SurroundLeft : Blue ComponenVtideo " Y " : Green multichanneinl put , outputandspeakerconnections , SurroundRight : Gray ComponenVtideo " Pr " : Red allconnectiojnacksandterminalsarecolor - coded SurroundBackLeft : Brown ComponenVtideo " Pb " : Blue asfollows : SurroundBackRight : Tan OpticaDl igitalIn : Black FrontLeft : White Subwoofer : Purple OpticaDl igitaOl ut : Gray FrontRight : Red CoaxiaDl igitaAl udio : Orange Center : Green CompositVeideo : Yellow
Page: 9

REAR - PANEL CONNECTIONS O AMAntenna : ConnecttheAMloopantennasup 0 CenterSpeakerOutputs : Connecttheseoutputs Video1 VideoInputs : Connectthecompositeor pliedwiththereceivetrotheseterminafaIfanexternal to thematching + and terminalsonyourcenter S videoPlAY / OUTjacksof aVCAorothervideo AMantennaisused , makeconnectiontso theAMand channeslpeakerI . n conformancweiththeCEAceloF sourceto thesejacks . GNDterminalsinaccordancewiththeinstructionssup codespecificationth , egreenterminalisthepositive Video1 VideoOutputs : Connectthecomposite pliedwiththeantenna . ( + ) terminatlhatshouldbeconnectedto thered ( + ) or S videoRECANjacksof a \ / ORor othervideo terminaol nspeakerswiththeoldercoloFcoding . FMAntenna : Connectthesuppliedindoororan recoTdindgevicesuchasa DVDrecorderorPVRto Connecttheblack _ ) terminaol ntheAVRto the optionaelxternaFlMantenntao f : isterminal . thesejacks . blacknegative _ ) terminaol nyourspeakeT ( S . ee page16tot moreinformatioonnspeakerpolarity . ) _ ] 1PreampOutputs : Connectthesejacksto an i _ ) Video2 VideoInputs : Connectthecompositeor optionale , xternapl oweramplifiefror applications S videoPLAY / OUjTacksof aVCRorothervideo i _ ) SurroundBactdMultiroomSpeakerOutputs : wherehigherpowerisdesired . sourceto thesejacks . Thesespeaketrerminalsarenormallyusedto power thesurroundbackleft / surrounbdackrightspeakers 0 SubwooferOutput : Connectthisjackto theline i _ ) Video2 VideoOutputs : Connectthecomposite ina 7.1 channeslystem . Howeverth , eymayalsobe levelinputof a poweredsubwooferI , fanexternaslub - or S videoREC / INjacksof aVCRor othervideo usedto powerthespeakersina secondzone , which wooferamplifierisused , connectthisjackto thesub recordingdevicesuchasa DVDrecorderorPVRto willreceivetheoutpust electedfor amuWroomsystem wooferamplifierinput . thesejacks . Tochangetheoutputfedto theseterminalsfrom thedefaulot f theSurroundBackspeakersto the A - BUSConnector : Connectthisjackto anoptional Video3 VideoInputs : Connectthecompositeor MulSroomOutputy , oumustchangea settinginthe A BUS _ certifiedremoteroomproductto extendthe S videoPlAY / OUTjacksof aVCRorothervideo AdvancedMenuof theOSDsystemS . eepage41 for multiroomcapabilitieosfyourAVR435 Seepage17 sourceto thesejacks . formoreintormatloonnA BUS , moreinformatioonnconfiguringthisspeakeroutput . In ComponentVideoMonitorOutputs : Connect normalsurroundsystemuse , thebrownandblackter 0 SurroundSpeakerOutputs : Connecttheseout theseoutputsto thecomponenvtideoinputsofa minaisarethesurroundbackleftchannepl ositive ( + ) putsto thematching + and terminalsonyoursur videoprojectoor r monitorW . hena sourceconnected andnegative ( ) connectionasndthetanandblack roundchannesl peaker - Isn . conformancewiththeCEA to oneof theComponenVt ideoInputs _ is terminalsarethesurroundbackrightpositive ( + ) and colopcodespecificaSenth , eblueterminails theposi - selectedt , hesignawl illbesentto thesejacks . negative ( ) terminalsF . ormullroomuse , connectthe tive ( + ) terminatlhatshouldbeconnectedto thered brownandblackSBLterminalsto theredandblack DVDComponentVideoInputs : Theseinputs ( + ) terminaol ntheSurroundLeftspeakerwitholder connectionosntheleftremotezonespeakerandcon maybeusedwithanysourcedeviceequippedwith colopcodingw , hilethegrayterminasl houldbecon - nectthetanandblackSBRterminalsto theredand analogY / Pr / Pbor RGBcomponenvtideooutputsT . he nectedto thered ( + ) terminaol ntheSurroundRight blackterminalsontherightremotezonespeaker . facton / defaulits forthesejacksto belinkedto the speakewr iththeoldercolopcodi % , Connecttheblack DVDinput , butyoumaychangetheset , rigat any ACPowerCordJack : ConnecttheACpower ( ) terminaol ntheAVRto thematchingblacknega - timethroughthe T N PU 1 " SE 1 " U P menu , See cordto thisjackwhentheinstallatioins complete . tive ( ) terminalsforeachsurroundspeaker ( . See page21for moreinformatioonnconfiguringthe ToensuresafeopeTationu , seonlythepowercord page16 formoreintormallononspeakerpolarity . ) componenvtideoinputs . suppliedwiththeunit , Ifa replacemenist required , FrontSpeakerOutputs : Connecttheseoutputs it mustbeof thesametypeandcapacity . ComponentVideo1 Inputs : Theseinputsmay to thematching + or - terminalsonyourleftandright beusedwithanysourcedeviceequippedwithanalog SwitchedACAccessoryOutlet : Theseoutlets speakersW . henmakingspeakerconnectionsa , lways WPr / Pbor RGBcomponenvtideooutputsT . hefactory maybeusedto poweranydeviceyouwishto have makecertainto maintaincorrectpolaritybyconnecting defaultisforthesejacksto belinkedto theDVDinput , turnedonwhentheAVR435 islsrnedonwiththe thecoloFcoded ( whiteforfrontleftandredfor % nt butyoumaychangethesettingat anytimethrough Standby / OnSwitchH . right ) ( + ) terminalsontheAVR435 to thered ( + ) the TNPUT SETUP menu . Seepage21 for terminalsonthespeaker - asndtheblack ( - ) terminals morninformatioonnconfiguringthecomponenvtideo UnswitchedACAccessoryOutlet : Thisoutlet ontheAVR435 to theblack ( ) terminalsonthe inputs , maybeusedto poweranyACdeviceT , hepowerwill speakersS . eepage16for moreintormatioonn remainonat thisoutlet , regardlesosf whethetrhe ComponentVideo2 Inputs : Theseinputsmay speakerpolarity . AVR435 is onoroft . beusedwithanyvideosourcedeviceequippedwith Q FanVents : Theseventilationholesaretheoutput analogY / Pr / Pbor RGBcomponenvtideooutputsT . he NOTE : Thetotalpowerconsumptioonf alldevices of theAVR435 ' s airflowsystemT . oensureproper factorydefaultis forthesejacksto belinkedto the connectedto theaccessoroyutletsshouldnotexceed operationof theunitandto avoidpossibledamageto Video2 input , butyoumaychangethesettingat any 1O0watts , delicatesurfacesm , akecertainthattheseholesam timethroughthe I N PU T SE T U P menu , See notblockedandthatthereis at least3 inchesof open page21 formoreintormatioonnconfiguringthecom - _ ) VideoMonitor Outputs : Connectthesejacksto spacebetweentheventholesandanywoodenortab ponenvt ideoinputs . thecompositeorS videoinputof aW monitoor r ricsurfacei , tis normaflor thefanto remainoffat videoprojectotro viewtheon - screenmenusandthe MultiroomIAInput : Connecttheoutpuot f anIR mostnormavl olumelevefaAnautomatictemperature outputof anystandardvideosourceselectedbythe sensorina remoteroomto thisjackto operatethe sensorturnsthefanononlywhenit is needed . receiver'svideoswitcher . / _ , / R435 ' smulllroomcoMolsystem . DVDVideoInputs : ConnectthecompositeorS videooutputsof a DVDplayeror othervideosourceto thesejacks .
Page: 10

REAR - PANEL CONNECTIONS RemoteIRInput : IftheAVR435 ' s frontpanel CDAudioInputs : Connectthesejacksto the IRsensoris blockeddueto cabinetdoorsor other left / righat nalogaudiooutputof a compacdt iscplayer obstructionsa , nexternalIRsensormaybeused . orCDchangeor r otheraudiosource . Connecttheoutputof thesensorto thisjack . OpticalDigitalAudio Output : Connectthisiack , _ j RemoteIROutput : Thisconnectionpermitsthe to theopticadl igitalinputconnectoor na CDR / RW , IRsensorinthereceiverto serveotherremotecon - MiniDiscor othercompatibledigitalrecorder . trolleddevicesC . onnectthisjackto the'IR IN " jackon DVDAudioInputs : Connecttheleft / righat nalog compatibleHarmanKardonequipment . outputsof a DVDplayerorotheraudiosourceto € _ " RemoteIRCarrierOutput : Theoutputof this thesejacks . jackis thefullsignarleceivedat theRemoteSensor @ TapeInputs : Connectht esejackstothePlay / Oout Window [ ] orinputthroughtheRemoteIRInput jacksofanaudiorecorder . includingthecarrierfrequenctyhatis removed fromsignalsat theRemoteIROutput _ . Usethis TapeOutputs : Connectthesejacksto the outputto extendIRremotesignalsto theinputof Record / Inpujatcksof anaudiorecoTder . compatibleproductsbydirectconnectionorthrough theuseof optionale , xternaIlR " blastersI " f . youarein • OpticalDigitalAudioInputs : Connecttheopti doubtasto whichofthelwoIROutputjacksto use , caldigitaol utputfroma DVDplayerH , DTVreceive _ , werecommendthatyouconsulwt ithyourdealeror theS / PDIFoutputof a compatiblceomputersound installehorcheckwiththemanufactureorftheexternal cardplayingMP3filesorstreamsL , Dplayeror CD equipmenytouwishto control . playerto thesejacksT , hesignaml aybea DolbyDigital signal , a DTSsignaol ra standardPCMdigitasl ource , RS - 232Port : Thisjackmaybeusedto control theAVR435 overa bi - directionaRl S - 232serial Video1 Audio Inputs : Connecttheleft / right controllinkto a compatiblceomputeorrprogrammable PLAY / OUaTudiooutputjacksonaVCRorothervideo remotecontrosl ystem . Dueto thecomplexib / of sourceto thesejacks . programminRgS - 232commandswestrongly ( _ Video1 AudioOutputs : Connecttheleft / right recommendthatconnectiontso thispo _ ttor REC / INaudioinpujtacksona VCRor othervideo contropl urposesbemadebya trainedandqualified sourceto thesejacks . technicianT . hisjackmayalsolinkto a compaSble computetro upgradethesoftwareandoperatingsys @ Video2 Audio Inputs : Connecttheleft / right tamoftheAVR435 whenupgradesareavailable . PLAY / OUaTudiooutputjacksonaVCRorothervideo sourceto thesejacks . CoaxialDigitalAudio Output : Connectthisjack tothecoaxiadl igitailnputof a CDR / RWM , iniDiscor @ Video2 Audio Outputs : Connecttheleft / right othercempaabldeigitarlece _ deT . REC / INaudioinpujtacksona VCRor othervideo sourceto thesejacks . @ MultiroomAudioOutputs : Connectthesejacks totheoptionael xternaaludiopoweramplifiear nd 8 - ChannelDirect Inputs : Thesejacksareused videodistributiosnystemthatdeliversthesource forconnectionto sourcedevicessuchas DVDAudio selectedfor multizonedistribution . orSACDplayerswithdiscretaanalogoutputs . Dependingonthesourcedeviceinuse , alleightjacks _ } _ CoaxialDigitalAudioInputs : Connectthecoax maybeused , thoughin manycasesonlyconnections digitaol utpuftroma DVDplayerH , DTVreceivet _ h , e to thefrontleft / right , centers , urroundleft / righat nd S / PDIFeuto _ ofa compaSblceomputesroundcard LFE ( subwoefeinr put ) jackswillbeusedforstandald playingMP3filesorsbeamsL , DplayeorrCDplayetro 5.1 audiosignals . thesejacksT . hesignaml aybea DolbyDigitaslignal , DTSsignaol rastandardPCMdigitasl ourceD . onet _ ) Video3 AudioInputs : Connecttheleft / right connecttheRFdigitaloutputof anLDplayerto PLAY / OUaTudiooutputjacksonaVCR , PVRc , able thesejacks . set top , satal ] itareceivehHDTVreceiverorothervideo sourceto thesejacks .
Page: 11

MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS O PoweOr ff Button I _ PoweOr n Button O LCDIntormationDisplay MUTE O InputSelectors AVRSelector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 DSPSurroundModeSelector DVD Q Logic7 ModeSelectButton DirectButton ClearButton harman / kardon NumericKeys TuningModeButton i _ DimButton ChanneSl electButton 1TST SUI _ _ D ' _ SURR NavigatioBnutton DigitaSl electButton LOGIC7 STEREO DTS NEO _ 6 SetButton VolumeUp / DownSelectors TransporFt astPlay / ScanButtons CL _ R JKL @ TrackSkipUp / DownButtons PresetUp / DownButton I _ VideoInputButton DiscSkipButton ProgramButton LightButton MultireomButton OSDButton NightModeButton ToneControBl ulton SleepButton AM / FMButton TuningUp / DownButton ChanneUl p / DownSelector MemoryButton StereoModeSelectButton DTSNeo : 6ModeSelectButton DTSDigitaMl odeSelectButton DolbyModeSelectButton 6 / 8 ChanneIlnputSelect MuteButton 0 Lens NOTES : • Thefunctionnamesshownherearee , achbutton'sfeaturewhenusedwiththeAVR435 . Most buttonshaveadditionaflunctionws henusedwithotherdevicesW . hena buttonis pressedt , he functionnamewillappearinthebottomlineof theLCDInformationDisplayi _ ) . , , Thejackontheupperrightsideoftheremoteisreservedtotfutureuse . Donotremovethe plugprovidedorconnectanydeviceto thelack . , , Tomakeiteasierto followtheinstructiontshatreferto thisillustrationa , largercopymaybe downloadefdremthePreducSt upportsectionforthisproductat www . harmankadon . com .
Page: 12

MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS IMPORTANNTOTET : heAVR435 ' s remotemay TestButton : Presethisbuttonto beginthe Dim Button : Pressthisbuftonto activatethe beprogrammetdo controlupb eightdevices , sequenceusedto manuallcyalibratetheAVR435 ' s Dimmefrunctionw , hichreducesthebrightnesosf the includingtheAVR435 . Beforeusingtheremote , outputlevels ( , Seepage29for moreinformatioonn front - panedl isplayo , rturnsit offenfirelyP . ressthe itis importantto remembetro presstheInput calibratintgheAVR435 . ) buttononceto changethedisplayto reducethe SelectorButtonO thatcorrespondtso theunit brightnesbsy 50 % , andpressitagainwithin5 sac 0 DSPSurroundModeSelector : Pressthis youwishto operateI . nadditiont , heAVR435 ' s ondsandthemaindisplaywillgo completeldyark . buttonto selectoneof theDSPsurroundmodess , uch remoteis shippedfromthefactoryto operatethe Notethatthissettingis temporaryr ; egardlesoef any asVMAx , Hall1 , Hall2 orTheatekEachpreseof the AVR435 andmostHarmanKardonCDor DVD changest , hedisplaywillalwaysreturnto fullbright - buttonselectsanothermode . ( Seepage34for more playersandcassettedecks . Theemoteis also nesswhentheAVRislurnedon , Theblueillumination intormatioonnsurroundmodes . ) capableof operatinga widevarieb / ofotherproducts aroundtheStandby / OnSwitch [ ] willalways Logic7 ModeSelectButton : Presethisbutton usingthecontrolcodesthatampartof theemote . remainat fullbrightnessregardlesosf thesettingto to selectfromamongtheavailableLogic7 surround Beforeusingtheremotewithotherproductsf , ollow remindyouthattheAVRissfillturnedon . Theblue modes ( . Seepage34fortheavailablLeogic7 theinstructionosnpages43 46 to programthe accentlightinginsidethevolumecontrolwillalso options . ) propercodestortheproductsinyoursystem . remainat fullbrightnesswhenthepanelis at 50 % , butgooutwhenthepanellightsarefullydimmed . Q Direct Button : Presethisbuttonwhenthetuner Itisalsoimportantto remembetrhatmanyof the is inuseto stallthesequencefordirectentryof a buttonsontheremotatakeondifferenftuncfions , ChannelSelectButton : Thisbuttonisusedto station'sfrequencyA . fterpressingthebutton , simply dependingontheproducst electedusingtheInput starttheproceseofsettingtheAVR435 ' soutpultevelsto presstheproperNumericKeys _ to selecta SelectorsO . Thedeseripfionsshownhemprimauly anexternaslourceO . ncethisbuftonis preseedp , ressthe station ( . Seepage37 formoreinformatioonnthetuner . ) detaitlhefuncfionosf theremotewhenitis usedto • , / • ontheNavigationButton _ to selectthe operatetheAVR435 . channebleingadjustedthenpresstheSetButton ClearButton : Whenprogramminthgeremote followedbythe • / • ontheNavigationButton orusingtile EzSefteatursp , ressthisbuttonto cancel 0 PowerOff Button : Pressthisbuttonto place againt , o changethelevesl etting ( , Seepage38 formore thecurrenft _ ncfionW . henusingtheremoteto enter theAVR435 ora selecteddeviceintheStandby information . ) frequenciefosrdirecttuneraccessp , resethisbutton mode . Notethatthiswillturnoffthemainroom to clearpreviouesntries . functionsb , utiftheMultiroomsystemis activated , NavigationButton : Thissingledisclikebuttonis itwillcontinueto function . usedto navigatethroughtheon screenconfigumfion NumericKeys : Thesebuttonsserveasa 10 menust , o scrsllthroughtheoptionslistandto select buttonnumerickeypadto entertunerpresetpositions . PowerOn Button : Presethisbuttonto turnon chobesforthevarioussettingssuchasdelays , peakers , Theyarealsousedto selectchannenl umberswhen thepowertoa deviceselectedbyfirstpressingoneof surroundmodesd , igitalinputse , tc . Tousethebutton , _ { , Cableor SAThasbeenselectedontheremoteo , r theInputSelectors _ ] P . simplypressit left , right , upor downinthedirection to selecttracknumbersona CD , DVDor LDplayer , OLOD InformationDisplay : Thistwolinescreen indicatedby the • / V / , 9 _ iconsprintedonthe dependingonhowtheremotehasbeenprsgrammed . displaysvariousinformatiodnependingonthecorn buttondisc . Dependinognthemenubeingused , Thesebuttonsarealsousedto enterlettersandnum - mandsthathavebeenenteredintotheremote . preseintghebuttonwilleitherchangea specificmenu berswhenrenamingdevicesintheLCDInformation or configuratiocnhoiceo , r itwillchangetheoption Display ( . Seepage50 formoreinformatioonnrenan Input Selectors : Preseingoneof thesebuttons shownintheon - screenor frontpaneldisplayT , he lngdevicesandkeys . ) willpe _ 1ormthreeactionsatthesametime , First , ifthe sectionsinthismanuadl escribintgheunit'sindividual AVR435 isnotturnedon thiswillpoweruptheunit , TuningModeButton : Presethisbuttonto fealuresandconfiguratioonptionscontainspecific Next , it willselectthesourceshownonthebuttonas changethetunermodebetweenmanuaal nd intormafioonnhowthenavigatiocnontrolsareused . theinputto theAVR435 . Finallyi , twillchangethe automaticW . henthebuttonis preseedsothat remoteconl _ oslothatitcontrolsthedeviceselectedi , n DigitalSelectButton : Pressthisbut [ onto asei % AU T0 / S T E I _ E 0 appearsintheUpper normaol perationt , heremotewillrevertto contrslling oneof thedigitailnputs _ ) _ [ _ Pll to a source . DisplayLine [ ] andintheon - screendisplayo , nly theAVRwhennobuttonis pressedfor 6 seconds . ' , Seepage33formoreinformatioonnusingdigital stationswithacceptablseignaql ualilywillbetuned , inputs , ) andthetunerwillplayFMstationsinstereow , hen Thisallowstheremoteto automaficallryeturnto con availablein , theAUTOmodew , hentheTuning trolof importanftunctionssuchasvolumem , uteand SetButton : Thisbuttonis usedto entersettings Up / DownButtonsLmJ _ ] p _ arepressedt , heunit surroundmodeselectionafteryouhaveusedthe intotheAVR435 ' s memon / I . t isalsousedinthe willautomaticallsyearchforthenextavailablestation remoteto contrslanothedr evice , ifyouwishto setupprocedurefsordelaytime , speakerconfiguration withgoodsignasl trengthW . henthisbuttonis preseed changethelengthof timethatthersmoteoperates andchanneol utputleveladlustment . sothat I1A NU AL / 110 N0 appearsin theUpper anothedr eviceo , r to havetheremoteremainactive VolumeUp / DownButtons : Thesecontrols DisplayLine [ ] andintheon screendisplaye , ach forcontroloftheotherdevice ( suchasa DVDplayer sharethecommondiscinthelowerthirdof the pressof theTuningUp / DownButtonsI _ J _ ] p _ orset topbox ) untilyoumanuallyreturncontrslto the remoteT . oraisethevolume , pressthebuttonmarked willmovethefrequencyupordowninsinglestep AVRbypreseingtheAVRSelector _ , followthe • by preseintgowardsthetopoftheremoteT . olower incrementsW . hentheFMbandis in use , pressingthe instructionosnpage52 . thevolumep , ressthebuttonmarked • bypressing buttonsothatthe MANUALmodeis acfivatedwill AVRSelector : Pressingthisbuttonwillswitchthe towardstheboftomof theremoteT . he _ / _ , buttons enableyouto tunestationswithweaksignalsby remotesothatitwilloperatetileAVR435 ' sfunctionsif , ontheleftandrightsidesof thisdiscchangechannels changingto monaurarleception ( . Seepage37 for theAVR435 isintheStandbymodei , twillalsoturnthe upor downwhentheTVc , ableboxor satelliteInput moreintormafioonntuneroperation . ) _ , / R435 on , Selectors _ havebeenpressed .
Page: 13

MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS Light Button : Pressthisbull : onto activatethe TuningUp / DownButton : Pressthisbutton TransportFast - Play / ScanButtons : Thesebut remote'sbacHighftoreaseof useindarkenedrooms . whenthetuneris inuseto changethestationto one tonshavenodirectfunctionontheAVR435 , butthey witha higheror lower % quency . Whenthetuneris in am usedwhentheremoteis programmedfora corn MultiroomButton : Pressthisbuttonto begin the I1A NU AL / 110 N 0 modee , achtapof the patibleDVDC , Dortapeplaye _ Pressintghesebuttons theprocessofactivatingthemultiroomsystemor to Selectorwillincreaseor decreasethefrequencbyy willtransmiat fastplayforwardf , ast - playreverseo , rtast changetheinputor volumelevelforthesecondzone . oneincrementW . henthetunerreceivesa strong - forwardor reversescancommanda , ccordintgo the ( Seepage41 formoreinformatioonnthemultlroom enoughsignafloradequatereception , 11A NU AL capabilitieosftheplayebr eingcontrolledInthefactory system . ) T UN El ) willappearintheLower DisplayLine defaulstettingthesebuttonsarepreprogrammwedith MacroButtons : Pressthesebuttonsto storeor [ ] andintheon - screendisplayW . henthetuneris in theremotecodesforHarmanKardonDVDplayersso recalal " Macro " w , hichisa preprogrammesdequence the AU T 0 / S T E RE 0 mode , pressthebutton thatyoumaycontroal compatibleplayerwithouthay of commandsstoredintheremote . ( Seepage46 for once , andthetunerwillscanfor a stationwithaccept ingto switchdevices . moreinformatioonnmacros . ) ablesignasl trengthW . henthenexthigheporIowep I _ MainTransportControls : Thesebuttonshave frequencystationwitha strong - enougshignalistuned , nodirectfunctionontheAVR435 , buttheyareused OSDButton : Pressthisbuttonto activateorturn thefrequencyscanwillstopandtheLower Display whentheremoteis programmefdor a compatible offtheOn - ScreenDisplay ( OSDs ) ystemusedto setup Line [ ] andtheonscreendisplaywillindicate DVDC , DortapeplayerP . ressingthesebuttons oradjusttheAVR435 ' s parameters . A UT 0 T UN El ) . Whenan FMStereostationis willtransmiat stop ( m ) , record ( o ) , orpause ( , ) Night ModeButton : Pressthisbuttonto acti tuned , thedisplaywillreadAU T 0 S T TUN ED . commanda , ccordingto thecapabilitieosftheplayer vatetheNightmodeT . hismodeisavailablienspecially Seepage37for moreinformallononusingthetuner . beingcontrolledI . nthefactorydefaultsettingt , hese encodedDolbyDigitasl ourcesa , ndit preserves ChannelUp / DownSelector : Thisbuttonhasno buttonsareprogrammewdiththeremotecodesfor dialogue ( centecrhanneli ) ntelligibiliatyt lowvolume functionwhentheAVRis beingcontrolledb , utwhen HarmanKardonDVDplayerssothatyoumaycontrol levels . a compatibleplayewr ithouthavingto switchdevices . programmefdor usewitha VCR , 11 / c , ablebox , satel litereceiverorethersimilarproduct , itwillchangethe ToneControlButton : Thisbuttoncontrolsthe TrackSkip Up / DownButtons : Thesebuttons channeul por down . Seepages43 53 formore tonemodesettingse , nablingadjustmenotf thebass denothavea directfuncllonwiththeAVR435 , but informatioonnprogrammintgheremote . andttebleboost / cutY . oumayalsouseitto takethe whenusedwitha compatiblpyrogrammeCdDor DVD tonecontrolsoutof thesignalpathcompletelfyor TransportPlayButtons : Thesebuttonshave changewr illchangethet _ ackorchaptecrurrentlybeing " flat " responseT . hefirstpressof thebuttondisplaysa nodirectfunctionontheAVR435 , buttheyareused playedI . nthefacton / defausltallng , thesebuttonsare t 0 NE T N messageintheLower DisplayLine whentheremoteis programmefdora compatible programmewdiththeremotecodestotHarmanKardon [ ] andintheon - screendisplayT . otakethecontrols DVDC , DortapeplayerP . ressingthesebuttonswill DVDplayerssothatyoumaycontroal compaQbpblayer outof thesignalpath , presseitherofthe , A , / V transmiat forwardor reverseplaycommand , withouht avingto switchdevices . NavigationButtons _ untilthedisplayreads accordingto thecapabilitieosf theplayerbeing I _ PresetUp / DownButton : Whenthetuneris in T0 NE 0 UT . Tochangethebassortrebleset - controlledI . nthefactorydefaultsettingt , hesebuttons use , pressthisbuttonto scrollthroughthestations tings , pressthebuttonagainuntilthedesiredoption areprogrammedforHarmanKardonDVDplayersso programmedintotheAVR435 ' s memory . appearsintheLower DisplayLine [ ] andin the thatyoumaycontroal eompallbleplayerwithout onscreendisplayandthenpresseitherof theA / V havingto switchdevices . VDIButton : Thisbuttondoesnothaveanyrune NavigationButtons _ to enterthedesiredboost tienfortheAVR , butisprovidedfor youruseinpro DelaySelectButton : Thisbuttonselects orcut settingS . eepage32 for moreinformatioonn grammingthecodesthatareusedto scrollupor thetoneconsols . adjustmenttso theAN SyncDelayandtheindividual downthroughtheavailabbinputsonyourvideodis channedl isplaysT . hefirstpressof thebuttondisplays SleepButton : Pressthisbultonto placetheunit play . Thisallowsyouto switchvideoinputsthatare an A / V SY NC I ) E L A Y messageintheLower intheSleepmode . Afterthetimeshowninthedisplay , directlyconnectedto yourvideodisplayA . lternatively , DisplayLine [ ] andintheon - screendisplayw , hich theAVR435 willautomalmalglyointotheStandby youmayprogramanycompatibleremotecodeinto meansthatyoumaychangetheamountof timethat mode . Eachpressof thebuttonchangesthetimeuntil the " up " and " down " potionsof thisbutton . Forintor allchannelasredelayedtogetherbehindthevideo . turn - offinthefollowingcider : mationon " learningr " emotecodesintoa button Thisenablesyouto compensatfeorthelossof lip 90 _ 80 _ 70 _ 6 { ) . , , , = , , e50 ontheAVRremotef , ollowtheinstructionsshown syncthatmaybecausedbydigitavl ideoprocesaing mlL mlr mm min rnln rnin 1 onpage44 , | t _ 40 3 9 _ 2 9 _ 10 _ OFF inyourdisplayorbytelevisionstationsT . ochange | rnin = , , , , , , _ mn mln mm - _ DiscSkip Button : Thisbuttonhasnodirect theAN SyncDelayp , resstheSetButton _ while functionfortheAVR435 butmaybeusedto change the A / V SY NC DE L A Y messageis visible WhentheSleeptimeris inuse , thefrontpaneldisplay thediscina CDor DVDchangerwhentheremoteis andthenusetheA / V NavigationButton indicatorws illdimto halfbrightness . programmetdor thattypeof device . to changethesettingsothatthesoundandthe AM / FM Button : Pressthisbuttonto selectthe videoimageareinsync . Tochangethedelayfor I _ ProgramButton : Thisbuttonisusedto begin AVR435 ' s tunerasthelisteningchoiceP . ressi % this anindMduaolutputchannelp , resatheA / V theprocesaof programmintgheremoteP . ressandhold buttonwhenthetuneris alreadyinusewillselect NavigationButton _ untilthedesiredchannel thisbuttonfor3 secondsto placetheremoteinthe belweentheAMandFMbands . nameisshown , andthenpresstheSet ButtonIi _ . programminmgodeO . ncetheredLEDundertheSet UsetheA / V NavigationButtons _ to change Button _ lightsr , eleasethebGton . Youmaythen thedelayamount . ( Seepage28for moreintormation salec % t m thedesiredoption . ( Seepages4353 for ondelayoptions . ) moreinformatioonnconfigurintgheremote . )
Page: 14

MAIN REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS SpeakerSelect Button : Pressthisbutton DolbyModeSelectButton : Thisbuttonisused to begintheprocessof configuringtheAVR435 ' s to selectfromtheavailableDolbySurroundmodes . bassmanagemenstystemT . henpressthe _ , / ' v Eachpressof thisbuttonwillselectoneof theDolby NavigationButton _ to selectthechanneyl ou ProLogicII , ProLogicIIxor DolbyVirtuaSl peaker wishto setup . PresstheSet Button _ and modesa , savailablfeor he numbeor f speakerisnyour thenselectanotherchannetlo configureW . henall systemWhena DolbyDigitaEencodesodurceis in adjustmenthsavebeencompletedp , resstheSet use , theDolbyDigitaml odemayalsobeselected . Button _ twiceto exitthesettingsandreturnto ( Seepage34for theavailablDe olbysurround normaloperation ( . Seepage26 for moreinformation modeoptions . ) onspeakersetup . ) 6 - Channel / 8 - ChanneIlnput Select : Pressthis buttonto selectthedeviceconnectetdo the6 - or8 - MemoryButton : Pressthisbuttonto entera ChannelDirect Inputs @ . ( Seepage32 formore radiostationto theAVR435 ' spresetmemon / . First , tunethedesiredstation , andthenpress11isbutton . information . ) Within5 secondsof whenyouseethestation's Mute Button : Pressthisbuttonto momeotadly frequencfylashintheUpperDisplayLine [ ] and silencetheA \ / R435 orTVset beingcontrolled , intheonscreendisplayp , ressthenumerickeys dependingonwhichdevicehasbeenselected . forthepresent umberbelweeo01 and30 thatyou wishto assignto thestation . ( Seepage37 for more Lens : Theinfraredemittersbehindtheplastic information . ) lensat thetopof theremotecommunicatteheremote codesto theA \ / R435 . Becertainthatthelensis not StereoModeSelectButton : Pressthisbutton coveredwhenusingtheremotea , ndpointthelens to selecta stereolisteningmodeW . henthebuttonis towa / dtheAVRfor bestresultsI . n learningmodet , he pressedsothatS UR R0 U ND 0 FF appearsin remotereceivesIRcodesto belearnedthrougha theLower DisplayLine [ ] , theAVRwilloperate sensorbehindthelens . ina bypassmodewithtrue , fullyanalogt , wochannel left / righst tereomodewithnosurroundprocessinogr NOTED : ONOTremovetherubbepr lugthatcoversthe bassmanagemenat , sopposedto othermodeswhere jackontheupperrightsideof theremoteThejackis notactiveandis reservefdorfutureuse digitapl rocessingis used . Whenthebuttonis pressed sothatS UR R0 UN D 0 FF appearsin theLower DisplayLine _ ] , andtheDSPandSurroundOff SurroundModeIndicators [ ] arelit , youwinenjoy atwo channepl resentatioonf thesound , alongwith thebenefitsof bassmanagemenDt . ependingon whetheryoursystemis configuredfor5 . t or6 . 1 / Y . 1 channelsth , enextpressof thebuttonwillcauseeither 5 CH STEREO or7 CH STEREO to appea _ a , ndthestareosi % alwillberoutedto allfive ( orsevens ) peakers ( . Seepage34 formoreinforma - tiononstareoplaybackmodes . ) DTSNeo : 6ModeSelectButton : Pressthis buttonto selecta DTSNeo : 6mode . ( Seepage34 fortheavailableDTSNeo : 6options . ) DTSDigitalModeSelectButton : Whena DTSencodeddigitasl ourceis playinge , achpressof thisbuttonwillscrollthroughtheavailablDe TSmodes . Thespecificchoiceof modeswillvaryaccordingto theb / peof encodingonthediscandyoursystem's speakecronfiguratioWn . hena DTSsourceis notin use , thisbuttonhasnofuncfion ( . Seepage34forthe availablDe TSdigitaol ptions . )
Page: 15

ZONE II REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS PowerOff Button : Whenusedinthemorn PresetUp / Down - TrackSkip Buttons : When wheretheAVR435 islocated , pressthisbutton theAVR435 ' stuneris selectedastheinputsource , to placetheunitinStandbyW . henit isusedina thesebuttonswillmoveupor downthroughthelistof POWER MUTE remoteroomwitha sensorthatis connectedto the stationsthathavebeenstoredinthepresetmemon / . MultiroomIRInput Jack _ , thisbuttonturnsthe Whena CDorDVDchangeor r playeris selected , VID2 AVR VID1 thesebuttonsactivatetheForwardorReverseTrack Multiroomsystemonandoff , orChapterSkipfunctions . @ AVRSelectorButton : Pressthisbuttonto turn ontheAVR435 . Theinputinusewhentheunitwas I [ ] [ _ Disc Skip Buttons : Pressthesebuttonsto lastonwillbeselected . changediscsoncompatibleHarmanKardonCDor DVDchangersorplayers . AM / FMTunerSelector : Pressthisbuttonto DN _ PRESET _ UP O VolumeUp / DownButtons : WhentheZoneII selecttheTunerastheinputto theMultimomsystem . remoteis usedinthemornwheretheAVR435 is Pressitagainto changebelweentheAMandFM bands , located , pressthisbuttonto raiseor lowerthevolume " " " " " " 0 inthatroom . Whenitis usedina remoteroomwitha Input Selectors : WhentheAVR435 is o _ sensorthatis connectedto theMultiroomIRInput pressoneofthesebuttonsto selecta specificinput Jack _ , thisbuttonwillraiseorlowerthevolumein andturntheuniton , Whentheunitisah - eadiyn use , theremoteroom . pressingoneofthesebuttonswillchangetheinput . PlayForward / Reverse / StopButtons : Press TuningUp / Down - Fast PlayButtons : When thesebuttonsto controlcompatibleHarmanKa _ don Z # neJSron theZoneIIremoteis usedinthesamemornasthe CD , DVDor cassetteplayers . harman / kard AVR435 , thesebuttonsmaybeusedto changethe frequencoyf thetunerT . hesebuttonsmayalsocontrol _ [ 4 Mute Button : WhentheZoneIIremoteis used J theFastPlayor FastReversefunctionsof compatible inthemornwheretheAVR435 is located , pressthis HarmanKa _ doCn D , DVDor cassettedecksin the buttonto temporarilsyilencetheunit . Whenit is used ina remoteroomwitha sensorthatisconnected sameroom , orfroma remoteroomwhenaniRlink is connectedto theAVR435 , to theMultiroomIRInput Jack _ , thisbuttonwill temporarilsyilencethefeedto theremoteroom Record / PauseButton : Pressthisbuttonto only . Pressthebuttonagainto returnto theprevious activatetheRecordorPausefunctiononcompahble vohmelevel . HarmanKa _ doCn D , DVDor casseltedeckproducts . PowerOffButton @ AVRSelectorButton AM / FMTunerSelector inputSelectors NOTES : TuningUp / Down - FastPlayButtons • TheZoneIIremotemaybeusedineitherthesameroomwheretheAVR435 is locatedor ina sepa / ate Record / PausBeutton roomwithanoptionailnfraredsensororA BUSproductthatisconnectedto theAVR435 ' s MultiroomIRInput ( _ PresetUp / Down TrackSkipButtons Jack _ . Whenit isusedinthesameroomastheAVR435 , itwillcontrolthefunctionsof theAVR435 or any DiscSkipButLon compatibleHarmanKardonproductsinthatroom . Whenit isusedina separateroomviaa sensorconnectedto O VolumeUp / DownButtons theMultiroomIRInput Jack _ - _ pth , ebuttonsforPowerI , nputSource \ , / olumeandMutewillconlrolthesource PlayForward / ReversdStoBputtons andvolumeforthesecondzone , as connectedto theMultiroomAudio OutputJacks @ , ( Seepage41 for MuteButton completeinformationonusingtheMultiroomsystem . ) • Tomakeit easierto followtheinshuctiontshat _ efetro thecontrolsandconnectorisn thisillustrationa , larger copymaybedownloadefdromthe ProducSt upportsectqofnorthisproducat t www . harmankardon , com ,
Page: 16

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 300 ohm - b - 75 ohmadaptorto makethe 8 . Connectiontso a subwoofearrenormallymadevia System Installation connection . a linelevelaudioconnectiofnromtheSubwoofer Afterunpackintgheunit , Ioca _ nigtina placewithade OutputQ to thelinelevelinputof a subwooter 7 . Connectthe % nt , centers , urroundandsurround quatavenllla _ oanndplacingitona solidsu _ 1acceapable witha buibinamplifierW . hena passivesubwoofer backspeakeroutputsCO0 @ to therespec d supportingitsweighty , ouwillneedto makethecon - is used , theconnectionfirstgoesto a powerampli tivespeakers . nectiontso youraudioandvideoequipment . tier , whichwillbeconnectedto oneormoresub wooferspeakersI . fyouareusinga poweredsub Toensurethatalltheaudiosignalsarecarriedb your IMPORTANNTOTEF : oryourpersonaslafetyandto wooferthatdoesnothavelinelevelinputconnec speakerswithoutlossof clarityorresolutionw , esug - avoidpossibledamageb yourequipmenatndspeakers , tions , followtheinstructionfsurnishedwiththe gestthatyouusehighqualityspeakercable . Many itisalwaysgoodpracticetoturnoffandunplugtheAVR speakerforconnectioninformation . brandsof cableamavailableandthechoiceof cable andALLsourceequipmenftloratheACoutpubt efore maybeinfluencebdy thedistancebelweenyour makinganyaudioorvideosystemconnections . 9 . Ifanexternaml ultichannealudiosourcewith speakersandthereceive _ th , etypeof speakersyou 5.1 outputssuchasanexternadl igitapl rocesaoW Audio EquipmentConnections use , personapl referenceasndothertactorsY . our decoderD , VDAudioor SACDplayeris used , con Werecommendthatyouusehighqualityinterconnect dealeror installerisa valuableresourceto consulitn necttheoutputsofthatdeviceto the8 - Channel cableswhenmakingconnectiontso sourceequipment selectingthepropercable . Direct Inputs _ ) . andrecordersto preservethe integritoyf thesignals . Regardlesosf thebrandof cableselectedw , erecom - VideoEquipmentConnections 1 . Connecttheanalogoutputof a CDplayerto the mendthatyouusecablewitha gaugeof 14orsmaller Videoequipmenist connectedinthesamemanner CDAudioInputs _ ) . Remembetrhatinspecifyingcablet , helowerthe asaudiocomponentAs . gaint , heuseof highqualify numbert ; hethickerthecable . interconneccat blesisrecommendetdo preserve NOTE : IfyourCDplayerhasbothfixedandvariable signaql uality . audiooutputsi , t isbestto usethefixedoutputunless Cablewitha gaugeof 16maybeusedforshortruns youfindthattheinputto thereceiverisso lowthatthe of lessthan10taet . Wedonotrecommendthatyou 1 . Connecat VCR'sor othervideosource'saudioand soundis noisy , orso highthatitis distorted . usecableswithanAWGequivalenotf 18or higher , videoPlay / Oujtacksto theVideol / Video 2 Audio dueto thepowerlossanddegradatioinnpertormance andVideoInput Jacks @ iD @ @ ontherear 2 . ConnecttheanalogPlay / Oujtacksof a casselte thatwilloccur : panel . TheAudioandVideoRecord / Ijnacksonthe deck , MD , CDR orotheraudiorecordetro the VCRshouldbeconnectedto theVideol / Video 2 TapeInputs _ ) . ConnecttheanalogRecord / In Cablesthatareruninsidewallsshouldhavetheappro AudioandVideoOutputJacks _ i _ ) @ _ on jacksontherecolderto theTapeOutputs priatamarkingtso indicatelistingwithUL , CSAorother theAVR435 . ontheAVR435 . appropriatteestingagencystandardsQ . uesSonasbout runningcablesinsidewallsshouldbereferredto your 2 . Connecttheanalogaudioandvideooutputsof a 3 . Connecttheoutputof anydigitalsourcessuchas installeorra licensedelectriciawnhois familiawr ith satellitereceiverc , ableR / converterortelevisionset a CDor DVDchangeror player , advancedvideo theNECand / ortheapplicablebuildingcodesin oranyothervideosourceto theVideo3 Audio game , a digitalsatellitereceive _ H , Dll / tuner or yourarea . andVideoInput Jacks € _ ) _ ) . digitalcableset - topboxortheoutputof a corn patiblecomputersoundcardto theOpticaland Whenconnecllngwiresb thespeakersb , ecertain 3 . Connecttheanalogaudioandvideooutputsof a CoaxialDigitalAudio Inputs _ ) _ [ [ ' _ [ ll to observeproperpolarityN . otethatthepositive ( + ) DVDor laserdiscplayerto theDVDAudio and terminaolf eachspeakecronnecSohnasa specificcolor Video Inputs @ _ . 4 . Connectht ecoaxiaolropticaDl igitalAudioOutputs code , as notedonpage8 . Howeverm , ostspeakers _ ' . " @ PontherearpaneloftheAVR435tothematch stillusea mdterminaflorthepositive ( + ) connection . 4 . Connecttheopficaol rcoaxiadl igitaal udiooutputs ingdigitailnputconnectionosna CDRorMiniDisc Connectthe " negativeo " r " black " wireto thesame of a DVDplayers , atellitereceiveTca , blebox , HDTV recorde _ . terminaolnboththereceivearndthespeaker . tunerorvideogameto anyof theOpticalor CoaxialDigital Inputs _ _ [ [ ' _ Hll Therecom 5 . AssembletheAMloopantennasuppliedwiththeunit NOTEW : hilemostspeakermanutacturearsdhereto mendedconnectionfora DVDplayeristo usea sothatthetabsat thebosomof theantennaloop anindustryconventioonf usingblackterminalsfor coaxiadl igitallinkconnectedto theCoaxiaDl igital snapintotheholesinthebaseC . onnecittto theAM negativeandredonesforpositives , omemayvary AudioInput1 , butyoumaychangethedigital and6NDScrewTerminalsO . fromthisconfigurationT . oensureproperphaseand audioinputassignmenfot ranysourceusingthe optimapl erformancec , onsulttheidenllficatiopnlateon Z N PU T SE T U P menua , s describedonpage yourspeakerorthespeaker'smanuatlo verifypolarity , 21 ortheDigitalInput SelectorF ' _ ii _ onthe If youdonotknowthe polariS / oyf ourspeakera , sk frontpanelor remote ( seepage33 ) . yourdealerforadvicebeforeproceedingo , rconsult NOTEW : henconnectinag devicesuchasa digital thespeaker'smanufacturer . cableboxorotherset - taptunerproductwitha digital Wealso recommendthatthelengthof cableused audiooutputw , e recommendthatyouconnectboth 6 . ConnectthesuppliedFMantennato theFM ( 75 - to connectspeakerpairsbeidentical . Forexample , thedigitaal ndanalogoutputsof theproductto your Ohm ) Connection _ . TheFMantennamaybe usethesamelengthpieceof cableto connectthe AVR . Theaudioinputpollingfeatureof theAVRwill anexternarloofantennaa , ninsidepoweredor frontleftandfront - rightor surroundleft andsur thenbeableto makecertainthatyouhavea constant wireleadantennaora connectionfroma cable round - rightspeakerse , venifthe speakersarea audiofeed , sinceitwillautomaticallsywitchtheaudio TVsystem , Iftheantennaor connectionuses differentdistancefromtheAVR435 . inputtotheanalogjacksifthedigitafleedisintenuptad 300 ohmlwindeadcabley , oumustuseanopllonal or notavailablefora particulacrhannel .
Page: 17

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS If yoursystemrequiresdirectconnectionof a video remotesensorfromreceivingcommandsI . n this Option2 : ConnecttheMultiroomAudio Outputs sourceto yourdisplayw , esuggestthatyouconsider event , anoptionarlemotesensormaybeused . € _ ' ontheAVR435 to theinputsof anopSonasltereo programmintgheVDIButtons _ so thatyoumay Connecttheoutputoftheremotesensotro the poweramplifierR . unhighqualityspeakerwirefrom changetheinputusedbyyourdisplayfromtheAVR's RemoteIB Input Jack _ . , _ . _ , theamplifietro thespeakersintheremoteroom . remote . Forinformatioonn " learningr " emotecodes If othercomponentasrealsoprevented % m receiving Option3 : Takingadvantageof theA \ / R435 ' s builtin intoa bultonontheAVRremotef , ollowtheinstruc remotecommandso , nlyonesensoris needed . Simply sevenchanneal mplifie _ it , is possibleto uselvvoof the tionsshownon page44 . usethisunit'ssensorora remoteeyebyrunninga amplifiecrhannelsto powerspeakersintheremote 5 . ConnecttheVideoMonitor OutputJacks i _ I on room . Whenusingthisoption , youwillnotbeableto connectionfromtheRemoteIROutputJack _ to thereceivetro thecompositeor S videoinputof theRemoteIRInputjackonHarmanKardonorother usethefull7 . 1 channeclapabilitieosf theAVR435 in yourtelevisionmonitororvideoprojector : compatibleequipment . themainlisteningroom , butyouwillbeableto add anotherlisteningmornwithoutexternaplowerampli 6 . If yourDVDplayerhasY / Pr / Pbanalogcomponent MultiroomIRLink fiers . Tousetheinternaal mplifiertso powera remote videooutputsc , onnectthemto theComponent TheremoteroomIRreceivesrhouldbeconnectetdo zone , connectthespeakersfortheremoteroomloca - Video1 Inputs € _ . Althoughthissetof inputsmay theAVR435 viastandardcoaxiaclableP . lugtheIRcon - tionto theSurroundBack / MultiroomSpeaker beassignedto anyof thefourvideoinputson nectioncableintotheMultiroomIRInputJack _ on Outputsi _ ) . Beforeusingtheremoteroom , you theAVR435 , thefactorydefaultis forthisinput theAVR435 ' 8rearpanel , willneedto configuretheamplifierfsor surroundoper to beassignedto theDVDAudio Inputs _ . ationbychanginga settingin theI1UL T TI _ 0 0 11 Remembetro makea digitaal udioconnection If otherHarmanKaldon - compatibsloeurceequipment menuf , ollowingtheinstructionsshownonpage41 . betweenthe DVDplayerandtheAVR , withthe is partof themainroominstallatiotnh , eRemoteIR OutputJack _ onhe rearpanesl houldbecon - CoaxialDigitalInput 1 I _ beingthefactory NOTEF : oralloptionsy , oumayconnectanoptional defaultF . orinformatioonnchangingtheinput nectedto theIRINjackonsourceequipmenTt . hiswill IRsensorintheremoteroomto theAVR435 viaan enabletheremotemornlocationto controsl ource assignmentfsor eitherthecomponenvtideo appropriatceable . Connectthesensor'scableto the jacksortheDVDplayer'saudioconnecllons , ee equipmenftunctions . MultiroomIRInput _ ontheAVR435 anduse page21 , theZoneIIremoteto controtlheroomvolumeA . ires Whena remoteIRsensorisusedto controlnon nativelyy , oumayinstalal nopllonavl olumecontrol 7 . If youhaveotherdeviceswithY / R / Pbor RGB HarmanKardonsourceequipmenwt , erecommend betweenf : Teoutputoftheamplifierasndthespeakers . componenvtideooutputsc , onnectthesource thatyoumakea directconnectionoruseanoptional , externaIlR " blasterc " onnectedto theRemoteIR deviceto theComponenVt ideo2 Inputs _ ) . A - BUS ® InstallationConnections Theaudioconnectionms aybeto anyof theVideo CarrierOutputJack _ _ ' , Ifyouareindoubtasto TheAVR435 isamongthefewreceiversavaihble AudioInputs _ _ _ [ ] ortheOpticalor whichIROutpujtackto usefortheequipmenitnyour thatofferbuiltinA - BUSReadyoperationW . henused CoaxialDigitalInputs ! _ ) _ r _ Pl . Whenusing systemc , ontactyourdealerorinstallero , rthemanu - withanopSonaAl - BUSproduct , youhavealltheben eitherof theComponenVtideoInputsm , akecertain faclsmr'ssuppo _ sliteandaskwhethertheunitto be dits of remotezoneoperationwithouttheneedfor an thattheaudioandvideoinputsareproperlyconfig controlleduses " fullcarrier " or " strippedc " arrierIR externapl oweramplifie _ . uredinthe TNP UT S ET UP menua , s commandsW . hen " fullcarriercommandsa " reused , maketheconnectionto theRemoteIRCarrier describedonpage21 . TousetheAVR435 withanapprovedA - BUSprod OutputJack _ . _ . Otherwisem , aketheconnectionto uct , simplyconnectitto theAVR435 usingstandard 8 . If thecomponenvtideoinputsare used , connect theRemoteIBOutputJack _ as notedabove . Category5 wiringthatis properlyratedforthespecific theComponentVideoMonitorOutputs _ to in - wallinstallationT . erminattehewiringat thereceiver NOTE : Allremotelycontrolledcomponentsmustbe thecomponenvtideoinputsof yourTV , projector endto a standardRJ 45 connectoirncompliance linkedtogetherina " daisychain'C . ' onnecttheIROUT ordisplaydevice . withtheinstructionfsurnishedwiththeA - BUSproduct jackof oneunitto theIB INof thenextto establish thischain . 9 . If youhavea camco _ devri , deogameorother Youmayconnecta singleA - BUSmoduleto the audio / videodevicethatis connectedto theAVRon AVR435 withnofurtherequipmennteededI . fyou MultiroomConnections a temporaryratherthanpermanenbt asisc , onnect wishto connectmorethanoneA BUSmodulea , n TheAVR435 isequippedwithmultizonecapabililles theaudiov , ideoanddigitaal udiooutputsof that optionale , xternaAl - BUShubmaybeusedto thatallowitto senda separateaudiosourceto the deviceto theFront - PaneIlnputsI _ PlI ' _ I , A providethatcapabilityC . ontacyt ourdealeror remotezonefromtheoneselectedforuseinthe deviceconnectedhereis selectedastheVideo4 v _ tww . harmankardon . tcootmmoreinformationon [ nain room . input , andthedigitailnputsmustbeassignedto the otherA BUSproductsavailablferomHarmanKaldon . Video4 input , ( Seepage21 formoreinformation Dependingonyoursystem'srequirementt , hree Nofurtherinstallatioonr adjustmenist neededa , sthe oninputconfiguration . ) optionsareavailablefor audioconnection : A - BUSjackontheAVR435 routesthesignalsto their System and Power Connections Option1 : Usehigh - qualitys , hieldedaudiointercon - properdestinatiofnor poweTs , ignasl ourceandconl _ ol . nectcablefromtheAVR435 ' s locationto theremote Theoutpuftedto theA BUSjackis determinedbythe TheAVR435 is designedforflexibleusewithmulti - room . Intheremoteroom , connecttheinterconnect AVR435 ' s multimomsystemandmenus . roomsystemse , xternaclontrocl omponentsand cableto a stereopoweramplifieT _ h . eamplifiewr illbe poweramplifiers . RS - 232Connections connectedto theroom'sspeakersA , ttheAVR435 , TheAVR435 is equippedwithanRS - 232Serial Main RoomRemoteControlExtension plugtheaudiointerconnecctablesintotheMultiroom ConnectionPort - _ thatmaybeusedfortwo pur Ifthereceiveris placedbehinda solidorsmoked AudioOutputs @ ontheAVR435 ' s rearpanel . posesW . hentheportis connectedto a compatible , glasscabinetdoor , theobstructionmaypreventthe
Page: 18

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS optionale , xternaclomputerk ; eypador controsl ystem , MOTEM : anyaudioandvideoproductsgo intoa theAVR435 is capableof bi directionaclommunica - Standbymodewhentheyareusedwithswitchedout tionsthatenabletheexternaslystemto controlthe lets , Thistypeof productmaynotoperateproperly whenusedwiththeswitchedoutlet . AVRa , ndfortheAVRto reportstatusandhandshake databackto thecontmlle _ U . seof theRS232 pertfor TheUnswitchedACAccessoryOutleti _ is thistypeof controlrequiresspecifictechnicakl nowl poweredaslongastheAVRispluggedintoa edge , andwerecommendthatanyconnectionand poweredACoutlet . programminfgorcontrolbemadebya trainedinstaller ortechnicianfamiliawr iththeequipmenbteingused . TheAVR435 featuresa removablepowercord thatallowswiresto beruninadvanceto a complex TheRS - 232portmayalsobeusedasanaccess installatiosnothattheunititselfneednotbeinstalled pointthroughwhichtheAVR435 ' s operatingsystem andsurroundmodememoriesmaybeupdatedvia unSilt is readyfor connectionW . henallneeded connectionhsavebeenmadec , onnecttheAC connectionto acompatiblecomputerA . tthetime thatanyupgradeisavailablein , structionfsormaking Powercordto theACPowerCordJack i _ ) . theconnectionandinstallingtneupgradewillbe TheAVR435 drawssignificantlmy orecurrenttnan availabltehroughtheProducSt upportareaof the otherhouseholddevicess , uchascomputersth , atuse HarmanKardonWebsiteat harmanka _ don . com . removablepowercords . Forthatreasoni , t isimportant Thephysicaclonnectionto theAVR435 ' s RS232 thatonlythecordsuppliedwiththeunit ( ora direct portisa standardD SUB9 connecl _ onb , utto ensure replacemenotf identicaclapacityb ) eused . compatibleandproperoperations , pecificso _ vare commandasndpinwiringschemesmayberequired . Oncethepowercordis connectedy , ouarealmost readyto enjoytheAVR435 ' 8incrediblepower A6 Power Connections andfidelit ! ! Thisunitis equippedwithtwoaccessorAyCoutlets , Theymaybeusedto poweraccessorydevicesb , ut theyshouldnotbeusedwithhighcurrentdrawequip mentsuchas poweramplifiersT . hetotalpowerd _ aw to eachoutletmaynotexceed1O0walts . TheSwitchedACAccessoryOutlet _ is powered onlywhentheunitis on . Thisisrecommendefdor devicesthathavea mechanicaplowerswitchthatmay beleftinthe " ON " position .
Page: 19

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Whenallaudio , videoandsystemconnectionhsave positionA . swiththesidespeakemr , earsurrounds Center Front Speaker shouldbelocatedsothatthebottomofthecabinet beenmadet , herearea fewconfiguraSoandlustments tmore thatmustbe madeA . tewminutesspentto correctly isat least2 feethigherthanthelistenerse ' ars . The No than 24 ' configureandcalibratetheunitwillgreatlyaddtoyour speakersshouldbenomorethan6 feetbehindthe i i listeningexperience . rearof theseatingarea . SpeakerSelectionand Placement Ifdipoletypespeakerasre usedoneitherthesideor Left Front Right Front The placemenotf speakersina multichannehlome rearwallsof themorn , pleasenotethatif thereare Speaker Speaker theatersystemcanhavea noticeableimpactonthe arrowsonthespeakerstheyshouldfacethefrontof qualityof soundreproduced . A ) FrorTbc ' / TarsTprTeadke # rTstn / / atiownithdmct viewP ¢ theroomforthesidespeakerso , rtowardsthecenter sets oF # Qar : scFe _ l ? projectors . of thewallfortherearspeakers . Nomatterwhichtypeor brandof speakersis used , the samemodelor brandof speakershouldbeused Subwoofersproducenondirectionasol und , sothey q _ o _ P _ ojer , lren Screen for theleftfront , centerandrightfrontspeakersT . his maybeplacedalmostanywhereina room . Actual createsa seamlessfrontsoundstageandeliminates placemensthouldbebasedonroomsizeandshape Left Front Cente [ Front S # eaker Speaker Righ1Frontsgeaker the possibilityof distractingsonicdisturbancetshat andthetypeof subwoofeur sed . Onemethodof find occurwhena soundmovesacrossmismatchedfront ingtheoptimallocationfor a subwoofeirsto beginby channesl peakers . placingit inthefrontof theroom , about6 inches froma wall , or nearthefrontcornerof themorn . Anothermethodis to temporarilpylacethesubwoofer Speaker Placement at yournormallisteningpositiona , ndthenwalk Dependinognthetypeofcenterchanneslpeakeirn aroundtheroomuntilyoufinda spotwherethesub useandyourviewingdevicep , lacethecenterspeaker woofersoundsbest . Placethesubwoefeirnthatspot . eitherdirectlyaboveor belowyourTV , or inthecenter Youshouldalsofollowtheinstructionosf thesub behinda perforatedfront - projectiosncreen . weofer'smanufactureor , r youmaywishto experi mentwiththebestlocationfor a subweofeirnyour Oncethecenterchanneslpeakeris installedp , osition listeningroom . thefrontleftandfrontrightspeakerssothattheyare Rea , - Wall MDunting as farawayfromoneanotherasthecenterchannel System Setup speakerisfromthepreterredlisteningpositionId . eally , B ) Rearspeakermountingh analternatehsationtor thefrontchanneslpeakersshouldbeplacedsothat Oncethespeakershavebeenplacedintheroomand 5 7 systemsIt h rsqu # sdfor7 7 operation theirfi _ veetearsrenomorethan24 " aboveor below connectedt , heremainingstepsinthesetupprocess thelweeterinthecenterchanneslpeaker . areto assigninputandoutputconnectionsm , akeany toneadjustmentsse , lecta surroundmode , program a Dependingonthespedficsof yourroomacoustics theAVR435 ' s bassmanagemenstystemforthetype andthetypeof speakersinuse , youmayfindthat of speakersusedinyoursystemc , alibratetheoutput i _ , _ At least 6 inches from ceiling imagingis improvedby movingthelettfrontandright levelsandsetthedelaytimesusedbythesurround frontspeakersslightlyforwardof thecenterchannel sauedprocessah speakehIf possiblea , djustallfrontloudspeakers At least 2 feet sothattheyareaimedat earheightwhenyouare Althoughit is necessartyoassigninpuVoutpuste _ ngs seatedinthe listeningposition . andsurroundmodechoicesmanuallyw , erecommend thatyoutakeadvantageof thepowerandprecisionof Usingtheseguidelineyso , u'lflindthatittakessome EzSet / EQto automaticallsyelectandenterthesettings experimentafitoonfindthecorrectlocationtorthe % nt forallotheraudioparametersT . hiswillnotonlysave speakerisnyourparticulainr stallationD . on'tbeafraidto youtime ; itwillensurethatyourroomis calibratedand movethingsaroundunfilthesystemsoundscorrect . equalizedwithanaccuracynotpossiblewhenthese Optimizyeourspeakerssothataudiotransitionascross settingsaremademanually . thefrontofthemornsoundsmootha , ndthatsounds Youarenowreadyto poweruptheAVR435 to begin fromallspeakerasppearto arriveat thelisteningposi speakemshouldbelocatedsothatthebottomof the thesefinaladjustments . tionat thesame8me ( withoudt elayfromthecenter cabinetis atleast2 feethigherthanthelistenerse ' ars speakecromparedto theleftandrightspeakers ) . whenthelistenersareseatedinthedesiredarea . 1 . MakecertainthattheACpowercordisfirmly insertedintotheACPowerCordJack WhentheAVR435 is usedin 5.1 - channeol peration , Rearsurroundspeakemarerequiredwhena full7 . 1 andplugthecordintoanunswitcheAdCoutlet . thepreferredlocationforsurroundspeakemis onthe channeslystemis installeda , ndtheymayalsobe Tomaintaintheunit'ssafetyratingD , ONOT sidewallsof theroom , at orslightlybehindthelisten usedin5 . 1 channeslystemsasanalternativme ount substitutethepowerco _ dforonewithlower ingpositionI . na 7.1 channeslystem , bothsidesur i % positionwhenitis notpracticatlo placethemain currentcapacity . roundandbacksurroundspeakersarerequiredT . he surroundspeakersonthesidesoftheroom . Speakers centerof thespeakershouldfaceintotheroom . The maybeplacedona rearwall , behindthelistening
Page: 20

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION TheAVR435 hasb _ voonscreendisplaymodes , Settingthe SystemConfigurationMemory 2 . PresstheMain PowerSwitch [ ] located " SemiOSD " and " FullOSD . W " henmakingconfigure TheAVR435featuresanadvancedmemorysystem behindtheFront - PanelControlDoor [ ] in tionadjustmentist , is recommendetdhatthefullOSD thatenablesyouto establishdifferenctonfigurations untilit latchesandtheword " OFF " onthetopof forthespeaker " size / c ' omponenvtideoassignment , modebeused . Thiswillplaceaneasilyviewedlistof theswitchdisappearisnsidethefrontpanel . Note digitalinput , surroundmodeandcrossovefrrequency theavailabloeptionsonthescreen . thattheilluminatioanroundtheStandby / On for eachinputsourceT . hisflexibiliteynablesyouto Switch [ ] willturnamberi , ndicatingthatthe Making ConfigurationAdjustments customizethewayinwhichyoulistento eachsource unitis intheStandbymode . ThefullOSDsystemis availablbey pressingthe andhavetheAVR435 memorizethosesettingsT . his 3 . Carefullryemovetheprotectiveplasticfilmfrom OSDButtondD Whenthisbuttonis pressedt , he meansf , orexamplet , hatyoumaysetdifferenstpeaker thefront - panellens . Ifleftinplace , thefilmwill MASTER MENU ( Figure1 ) willappeara ; nd configurationwsiththeresultancthangesto thebass adjustmentasremadefromtheindividuaml enus . prevenpt roperoperationof theremotecontrol , managemenstystemO , ncethesesettingsammade , theywillautomaticallbyerecalledwheneveyrouselect 4 . Instalflourof thesuppliedAAAbatteriesinthe _ MASTER MENU _ thatinput . remoteasshown . Becertainto followthe ( + ) INPUT SETUP and ( ) polarityindicatortshatareinthebattery AUDIO SETUP ThefactorydefaultsettingsfortheAVR435 haveall SURROUND SELECT compartment . EZSET / EQ inputsexceptfor DVDandVideo3 configuredforan NANUAL SETUP MULTI - ROOM analogaudioinput , theCoaxialDigitalAudioInput1 ADVANCED t _ forDVDandtheOpticalDigitalInput 1 isthedefaultforVideo3 , Thedefaulstpeakersettings are " Small " at allpositionsw , iththeSubwoofeorn . F _ gum1 Thedefaultsettingtotthesurroundmodesis Logic7 MusicforanalogsourcesD . olbyDigitaol r DTSwill ThesembOSDsystemis alsoavailablea , llowingyou automaticallbyeselectedasappropriatwe hena digital to makeadjustmentdsirectlyb , ypressingtheappro - sourceis inuse , 5 . TurntheAVR435 oneitherby pressingthe priatebuttonsonthe % nt panelor remotecontrolfor Standby / OnSwitch [ ] onthefrontpanelo , r thespecificpammetatro beadlustedF . orexampleto , Betoreusingtheunit , youmaywantto changethe viatheremotebypressingthePowerOnButton changethedigitalinputforanyof thesourcesp , ress settingsforsomeinputsso thattheyareproperly _ , theAVRSelector _ oranyof the theDigitalSelectButton _ andthenpressthe configuredto reflecttheuseof digitaol ranaloginputs , InputSelectorsq _ ] _ dl _ _ onthe , A / V NavigationButton _ to scrollthroughthe thetypeof speakersinstalledandthesurroundmode remoteT , hefightingaroundtheStandby / On listof oplonsastheyappearintheon - screendisplay specificsof yourhometheatesrystem . Remember Switch [ ] willturnblueto confirmthatthe or intheLower DisplayLine _ ' _ 1 . thatsincetheAVR435 memorizetshesettingsfor unitison , eachinputindividuallyyo , uwillneedto makethese TousethefullOSDmenusystemp , resstheOSD adjustmentfsoreachinputused . Howevero , ncethey Usingthe On - ScreenDisplay Button _ [ ) . Whenthemenuis onthescreenp , ress aremade , furtheradjustmenist requiredonlywhen Whenmakingthefollowingadjustmentyso , umayfind theA / V NavigationButton _ untiltheonscreen systemcomponentasre changed . iteasierto usetheAVR435 ' s onscreendisplaysys • e , cursoris nextto theitemyouwishto adjust , and tam , Theseeasyto readdisplaysgiveyoua clearpiG thenpresstheSet Button _ to adjustthatitem . Tomakethisprocessasquickandeasyaspossible , tureofthecurrentstatusof theunitandmakeiteasy Themenuswillremainonthescreenfor 20seconds , wesuggestthatyouusethef _ fl - OSDsystemwith to seewhichspeakerd , elayi , nputordigitasl election andthentheywill " timeout " anddisappeafrromthe theon - screenmenusa , ndstepthrougheachinput . youaremaking . screenT , hetimeoutmaybeincreasetdo asmuch Onceyouhavecompletedthesettingsforthefirst as50 secondsby goingto theA DVA NC ED input , manysettingsmaybeduplicatedfortheremain - Toviewtheonscreenmenusm , akecertainyouhave SE L E CT menu , andchangingtheitemtitled madea connectionfromtheVideoMonitor Out inginputsi , t isalsoa goodideato settheconfigura FULLOSD TIME OUT . rice dataintheordertheseitemsarelistedinthe Jack _ ) ontherearpanelto thecompositeor S II AS T E R 11E NU , assomesettingsrequirea videoinputof yourTVorprojectoLInorderto viewthe Whenthef _ ll - OSDsystemis inuse , themenuselec specificentryina priormenuitem . AVR435 ' s displayst , hecorrectvideosourcemustbe tionsamnotshownin theUpperor Lower Display selectedonthevideodisplayT . heon - screenmenus Lines _ ' lj , Whenthefull OSDmenusystemis Input Setup arenotavailablwe hena componenvtideo used , 0 SD 0 N willappearintheUpperDisplay displayis in use , Thefirststepis toconfigureeachinput . Oncean Line [ ] to remindyouthatavideodisplaymustbe inputisselectedt , hesettingsforthe DigitaIlnput , used . WhenthesemiOSDsystemis usedin conjunc IMPORTANNTOTEW : henviewingtheomscmen ComponenVtideoassignmenatndSurroundModewill tionwiththediscreteconfiguratiobnuttonst , heon menususinga CR _ basedprojectopr , lasmadisplayor " attacht " hemselvetso thatinputandbestoredina screendisplaywillshowa singlelineof textwiththe direct - viewCRTmonitoor rtelevisionit , isimportantthat nonvolatilme emoryT , hismeansthatoncemadet , he currentmenuselectionT . hatselectionwillalsobe theynotbeleftonforanextendedperiodof timeT . he selectionof aninputwillautomaticallryecaltlhoseset shownintheUpperor Lower DisplayLines [ ] [ ] , constandtisplayof a stahcimagesuchasthesemenus tings . Forthatreasont , heproceduredsescribedbelow dependingonwhichparameteirs beingadjusted . maycausetheimageto bepermanent " lbyurnedinto " mustberepeatedforeachinputsourcesothatyou theprojectiotnubesp , lasmascreenorCRTThistypeof havetheopportunittyo customizeeachsourceto your damageisnotcoveredbytheAVR435warrantaynd specificlisteningrequirementsH . owevero , ncemade , maynotbecoveredbytheprojecto _ / TsVet'swarranty . theyneednotbechangedagainunlessyouneedto
Page: 21

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION altera settingT . heconfiguratiosnettingstorspeaker thenextletteTa , ndcontinueun11thedesirednameis Tochangethedigitalinputat anylimeusingthedis " size " andcrossoveprointsaresetonceandapplied enteredu , pto a maximumof 14 characteraP . ress cretefunctionbuttonsandthesemiOSDsystem , to allinputs . theSetButton _ to entertheinputnameintothe presstheDigitalSelectButton _ ontheremote . systemmemoryandto proceedwiththeconfiguration Within5 secondsm , akeyourinputselectionusing WhenusingthefullOSDsystemto makethesetup theA / • NavigationButton _ untilthedesired process . adjustmentsp , resstheOSDButton _ onceso digitaloranaloginputis shownin theUpper Display thattheMAS TE R ME NU ( Figure1 ) appearsT . he If yoursystemincludesanysourcesthatareequipped Line [ ] andinthelowerlineof theon - screen • - > cursorwillbenextto theI NP UT SE TU P withY / PFPbcomponenvtideooutputst , heAVR435 display . line . PresstheSetButton _ andtheI NP UT is ableto switchthemto sendthepropersignalsto SE T UP menu ( Figure2 ) willappearonthescreen . yourvideodisplayE . achof thelwo Component Whenallneededadjustmenthsavebeenmade . pmsa Pressthe , / _ , NavigationButton _ untilthe VideoInputs _ ) maybeassignedto anysource the • NavigationButton _ untilthe . - > curaoris desiredinputnameappearsinthehighlightevdideo , nextto BACK TO MASTER MENU tocon foraddedsystemflexibilityT . hedefaultsettingis for as wellasbeingindicatedinthefront - paneIlnput theComponenVt ideo 1 Jacks _ to beassigned tinuewiththesystemconfiguration . Indicatorsi11 Whenyouarescrollingthroughthe to theDVDand6 / 8 ChanneDl irectinputsw , iththe listof avaihbleinputsy , ouwillheara slightclickfrom ComponentVideo2 Jacks _ ) assignedto allother Audio Setup timeto time . Thisis normala , s itis causedbythe inputs . Ifyoursystemdoesnotincludecomponent Thismenuallowsyouto configurethetonecontrols relaythatis usedto switchbetweenthetwo videoat thistime , orif youdonotneedto change andto turntheupsamplingonor oft Ifyoudonot ComponenVtideoinputs . thesedefaultsp , ressthe • NavigationButton wishto changeanyof thosesettingsat thistime , pro to goto thenextsetting . f teed to thenextmenuscreenH . oweverto . make INPUT SETUP configuratiocnhangesto thoseparametersm , ake SOURCE : _ TochangetheComponenVtideoassignmenfti , rst certainthatthe MAST ER MEN U is onscreen TITLE makecertainthatthe - - > curaoris pointingto the COMPONENT iN ; mm _ mmml withthe . - > cursorpointingto theAUD I 0 S ETUP DIGITAL IN : _ C0 MP 0 N EN T I N lineonthemenuscreen . line . andpresstheSet Buttoni _ i , . TheA UD I 0 andthenpressthe . _ / _ . NavigationButton BACK TO MASTER MENU S ET UP menu ( Figure3 ) willappeal untilyouseethedesiredinputinthehighlighted videoT . heclickingnoisethatyouwillhearwhenthe * AUDIO SETUP * componenvtideoinputsareswitchedis normal , due TONE : m OUT @ ure2 to therelayusedto ensureproperisolationbelween BASS : 0 TREBLE : 0 thelwo inputs . Whenoneof thefourVideoinputsis selectedasthe ADC SAMPLING : _ 96k sourcey , ouhavetheoptionof renamingtheinputasit BACK TO MASTER MENU Whenthedesiredcomponenitnputhasbeenselected . appearsintheonscreenandfrontpanelmessages . pressthe • NavigationButton _ to goto the Thisis helpfulifyouhavemorethanoneVCR . ifyou nextsetting . wishto associatea specificproductbrandnamewith theinput , orto simplyenteranynamethatwillhelp F _ gu3re If youwishto associateoneofthedigitalinputswith youto remembewr hichsaurceis beingselected . Thefirstlinecontrolswhetherornotthebasa / treble theselectedinputsourceorchangethedetaultdigital toneconholsareinthesignapl ath . Thenormadl efault inputselectionp , ressthe • NavigationButton Tochangetheinputnamep , resstheA / • ontheremotewhiletheI N / 0 U T SE T UP isforthemto beindineb , utif youwishto remove NavigationButton _ ontheremotesothatthe themfromthecircuittor " flat " responsef , irstmake menu ( Figure2 ) isonthescreena , ndtheonscreen cursoris pointingto T I T L E . Next . pressandhold certainthatthe . - > cursoris pointingto theT 0 N E cursorwilldropdownto theD I GI T AL I N line . theSet Button _ fora fewsecondsuntila flashing Pressthe , / _ , NavigationButton _ untilthe lineonthemenuandpressthe . _ / _ . Navigation boxappearsto therightof thecolon . Immediately nameof thedesireddigitailnputappearsT . oreturn Button _ sothat 0 U T is highlighteidnreverse releasetheSetButtonli _ iJ , asyouarenowready video . to theanaloginput , pressthebuttonuntiltheword to enterthedevicename . ANALOG appears . Ifyouwishto leavethetonecontrolsinthesignal PresstheA . / • NavigationButton _ andnote path . theamountoffboostor cutforbassandtreble Whenconfigurintghedigitalinputfora sourcedevice thata completesetof alphanumercicharactemwill maybeadjustedby pressingtheA / • Navigation suchasa digitalcableboxorothersettoptuner appearwiththestartof thealphabeitn capitalletters productwitha digitaal udiooutputwhereyouhave Button _ sothatthe . - > cursoris nextto bassor followedbythelowercaselettersandthennumbers trebledependingonwhichsettingyouwishto adjust . connectedboththedigitaal ndanalogoutputsof the andsymbolsW . henyoupressthe • Navigation sourceto theAVRs . electtheappropriatdeigitalinput Next , pressthe . _ / 11 _ NavigationButton _ until Buttonlil _ . a seriesof symbolsandnumberswill thedesiredsa _ ngis shown . onthismenuT . hedigitasl ourcewillbecomethe appearf , ollowedbya reverselistof thealphabeitn defaulta , ndtheAVRwillalwayslooktherefirstto lowercaselettersP . ressthebuttoneitherwayuntilthe seewhethera signails presentH . oweverif . thedigital Thismenualsoincludesa settingto turntheunit's firstletterof thedesirednameappearsI . fyouwishto upsamplinfgeatureonor off . Innormaluse , this datastreamis interruptefdoranyreasont , heAVRwill entera blankspaceasthefirstcharacteTpr , essthe _ . featureis turnedoff . whichmeansthatdigitasl ources automaticallsywitchto theanalogconnectionasa NavigationButton li ] _ . areprocessedat theirnativesamplerate . For backupT . hisis particularluysefulwhenconfiguring examplea , 48kHzdigitasl ourcewillbeprocessed theconnectiofnor digitasl ettopboxes , wheresome Whenthedesiredcharactearppeamp , msathe _ . channelfseaturedigitalsound , butothersdo not . at 4SkHz.HoweveLtheAVR435 allowsyouto NavigationButton _ andrepeattheprocessfor
Page: 22

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION f upsampletheincoming48kHzsignalsto 96kHz Eachof theoptionlinesonthismenu ( Figure4 , ) _ DOLBY SURR _ foraddedresolution . selectsthesurroundmodecategorya , ndwithineach MODE : _ ! _ of thosecategoriestherewillbea choiceof the Totakeadvantageof thisfeaturep , resstheA / V specificmodeoptions . NIGHT : _ MID MAX NavigationButton _ sothatthe . - - > cursorisnext BACK TO SURR SELECT tothe U PS AMPL I N G lineandpressthe . _ / _ , Thechoiceof modeswillvaryaccordingto thespeaker NavigationButton _ sothat0 N is highlighteidn configuratioinnyoursystemW . henthe SU RR reversevideoN . otethatthisfeatureis onlyavailable BACK lineof theSPEAKER SETUP menu fortheDolbyProLogicII Music , DolbyPmLogicII ( Figure6 ) issetto N 0 N E theAVR435 willbecon Movie , DolbyProLogicandDolby3 Stereomodes . F _ gu5m figuredfor5 . 1 channeol perationa , ndonlythemodes appropriatteo a fivespeakersystemwillappealW . hen Whenalldesiredchangeshavebeenmadeonthis Whenthe _ cumoris pointingto the M0 DE line , theSURR BACK lineofthe SPEAKER menu , pressthe , I , / V NavigationButton pressthe , / , NavigationButtons _ to selectthe SE TU P menu ( Figure6 ) issetto S MA L L or sothatthe . - > cursoris nextto theB AC K T 0 desiredDolbysurroundmodea , gainrememberintghat L A RGE , theAVR435 willbeconfiguredfor MA I N ME NU line ; presstheSet Buttonli _ iJ . thechoiceof availablme odeswinvarywiththetypeof 6.1 / 7.1 channeol perationa , ndadditionaml odes programmateriabl eingplayedandthenumberof Surround Setup suchas DolbyDigitaEl XandDTSESwillappeara , s speakersinyoursystemconfiguratioin . theyareonlyavailablwe hensevenmainspeakersare Thenextstepis to setthesurroundmodeyouwish presentI . n additions , omeof themodesavailablein to usewiththeinputthatwaspreviouslsyelectedin WhenDolbyPmLogicHMusicorDolbyPmLogicIIx theAVR435 willnotappearunlessa digitalsourceis theI NP UT SE TU P menu . Sincesurround Musicis selectedasthelisteningmode , threespecial selectedandis playingthecorrectbitstream . modesarea matterof personatlastef , eelfreeto seltingsare , availablteo tailorthesoundfieldto your selectanymodeyouwish youmaychangeit later . listeningroomenvironmenatndyourindividuatal ste Toselectthemodethatwillbeusedastheinitial Howeverto ] makeit easietro establisthheini17al andpreferences ( S . ! henotherDolbySurroundmodes defaultforaninput , firstpresstneA / • Navigation parameterfsortheAVR435 , we suggesLt ogic7 areselectedd , ottedlineswillindicatethattheseset Button _ untiltheonscreencursoris nextto the ( Cinemaor Music ) for - mostanaloginputs . Inthecase tingsare notactive . ) desiredmode'smastercategorynames , uchas of inputssuchasa CDPlayeT _ ] apeDeckorTunery , ou DOLBY SURROUND , DTS , DSP • CenterWidth : Thissettingadjuststhebalanceof the maywishto setthemodeto Stereo ( " Surrounodff " ) ( S UR R ) or S T E RE 0 . Next , presstheSet vocalintormatioinnthefrontsoundstagebetween astheyarenottypicallyusedwithmultichanneplro - Button _ to viewthesubmenuP . ressthe , / _ , thecenterandfrontleft / righst peakersT . helower grammateriala , ndit is unlikelythatsurroundencoded NavigationButton @ to scrollthroughtheavail settingsspreadthecenterchannesloundmore materiawl illbeusedAlternativeltyheLogic7 Music ablechoicesa , ndthenpressthe • Navigation broadlyintotheleftandrightchannelsA . higher ¢ ' modeis agoodchoiceforstereoonlysourcematerial Button @ sothatthecursoris nextto B AC K number ( upto " 7 " ) producesa tightercenter Seepage34 formoreinforma17oonnavailablesur T0 MAS T E R ME NU to continuethesetup channepl resentatioin . roundmodes . process . • DimensionT : hissettingairesthepemeiveddepth FordigitalprogrammaterialtheAVRwillalwaysexam of thesurroundfieldbycreatinga shalloweprresen - Thefollowingfewparagraphdsetailtheinstructions inethedatastreamandautomaticallsyelecta Dolby tationthatappearsto movesoundstowardthefront neededfor modeswithmu117pclheoices . Digitaol rDTSmodeasapplicable . of theroom , ora deeperpresentatiotnhatappears to movethecenterof thesoundfieldtowaidthe Itis easiestto completethesurroundsetupusingthe Onthe DOLBY SURROUND menu ( Fig . 5 ) , backof theroom . Theseltingof " 0 " is a neutral fullOSDonscreenmenusF . romtheMAS TE R choicesincludeDolbyDigitalD , olbyPmLogicII , Dolby detaultw , iththerangeof adjustmensthownas ME NU ( Figure1 ) , pressthe , _ , / v Navigation ProLogicIIx , MovieandMusic , DolbyProLogicand " R % ' fora deepe _ r , eanorientesdoundto " F % ' DolbyVirtuaSl peakerReferencoerWide . Fora Button @ untilthe . - > cursoris nextto the fora shallowefTro , ntorientedsound . SURROUND SELECT line . PresstheSet completedescriptionofthedifferentDolbySurround modess , eepage34 . TheDolbyDigitaEl XandDolby Button _ untiltheSURROUND SELECT • PanoramaS : witchthisseltingonor offto addan menu ( Figure4 ) is onthescreen . ProLogicIix modesareonlyavailablwe henthe envelopinwgraparoundpresentatiotnhatincreases systemis setfor 6.1 / 7.1 operationbyconfiguring theperceptionof soundalongthesidesof theroom . theSurroundBackspeakersto " Small " or " Large " a , s _ SURROUND SELECT _ $ describedonpage28 , or viaEzSeVEQW . hena disc Tochangethesepammetemp , ressthe ' v ' / A DOLRY SURROUND DTS is playingwitha DolbyDigitasl oundtractkhatcontains NavigationButtons _ whilethe D 0 L B Y LOGIC 7 S UR R0 UN D menuis onthescreenuntilthe . - > a specia " lflag " signalinthedatastream , theDolby DSP ( SURR ) STEREO DigitaEl XmodewillbeselectedautomaticallIyt . may cursoris pointingto thelineonthemenuwiththe alsobeselectedusingthismenuorthroughthefront parameteyrouwishto changeT . hen , pressthe _ / _ , BACK TO MASTER MENU panelor remotecontrolsa , sshownonpage33 . A NavigationButtons _ to altertheseltingto completeexplanalloonfthesemodesis foundon yourtaste . page34 . F _ gu4m WhentheDOLBY DIGITAL modeis selectedt , heNightmodesettingsareavailablea , s shownin Figure6 .
Page: 23

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION f programsoume ( DTS5 . 1 , DTSESMatixorDTS - ES _ , _ Mstatno ananalogstereosourcewithouat ny mm DOLBY SURROUND _ m Discrete ) P . ressthe _ / _ , NavigationButton _ to bassmanagemenst , othatthelefLandrightfront scrollthroughthechoicesthatareavailableforyour speakersreceivea fullrangesignal , straightthrough CENTER WIDTN : - - - systemandtheprograminuse . TheDTSNeo : 6Music fromtheinputgainsectionto thevolumecontrol , DIMENSION : - - - modeisavailablewithanalogandPCMdigitalstereo pressthe _ / • NavigationButton _ sothat PANORAMA : - - - NIGHT : _ MID MAX sourcesandtheDTSNeo : 6Cinemamodeis available SURROUND OFF appearsinthehighlighted BACK TO SURR SELECT withanalogmatrixsurroundencodedsourcesto deliver videoT . olistento two channeal nalogsourceswhile anenhanced5 . 1 channesloundfield . takingadvantageof theAVR435 ' sbassmanagement systemp , ressthe , / • NavigationButton _ so Whenthe5 . 1 configuratioins inuse , theAVRwill F _ gu6m thatSURROUND OFF + DSP appearsinthe automaticallsyelectthe5 . 1vemionof DTSprocessing highlightevdideo . whena DTSdatastroamis selectedW . henthe TheNightmodeisa featureof DolbyDigitatlhatuses speciapl rocessintgo preservethedynamicrangeand 6.1 / 7.1 modeis selectedt , heDTSESDiscrotemode Aftertheselechonasre madeontheDolby , DTS , willautomaticallbyeactivatedwhena DTSsourcewith fullintelligibilitoyf a moviesoundtracwk hilereducing Logic7 , DSP ( Surroundo ) rStereomenusp , ressthe thepeaklevel . Thispreventsabruptlyloudt _ ansitions theESDiscrote " flag " is in use . Whena nonESDTS A / T NavigationButton _ sothatthecursor fromdisturbingothersw , ithourteducingthesonic discis in use , youmayselecttheDTSESMatrix movestotheBACK TO MASTER MENU impactof a digitasl ourceT . heNightmodeisonly modethroughthismenuto createa funeight - speaker lineandpresstheSetButton _ . availablewhenspeciallyencodedDolbyDigitasl ignals surroundmodeS . eepage34 fora completeexplana tionof theDTSmodes . are played . Using EzSetYEQ OntheL 0GIC 7 menu , he selectionms adewith TheAVR435 usesHarmanKa _ don'EszSet / EOtach ToadjusttheNightmodesettingm , akecertainthatthe cursoris ontheN I GHT lineof the D0 L B Y the _ / • NavigationButton _ ontheremoteare nologyto automaticalclyonfigureyoursystemto deliver menu . Next , press , / I , NavigationButton _ to determinedbywhetherthe5 . 1 or6 . 1 / 7.1 channel thebestpossibleperformancebasedonyourspecific choosebetweenthefollowingsettingsa , stheyappear configuratioinsin use , ineithercase , theselectionof speakerselectionw , herethespeakersareplacedin intheon screendisplay : a Logic7 modeenablesHarmanKardon'sexclusive theroomandtheacoushcinfluenceisnyourlistening Logic7 processintgo createfullyenvelopingm , ulh room . Byusinga seriesof testsignalsandthepro 0 F F : When0 FF is highlightedth , eNightmode channeslurroundfromeithertwo channeSl tereo or cessingpowerof theTexasInstrumentDsA610 digital willnotfunction . Matrix - encodepdrogTamminsguchasVHScassettes , signalprocessoEr , zSWEQeliminatetsheneedfor laserdiscsor televisionbroadcastpsroducedwith manuaal djustmenotf speaker " size " c , rossovedr , elay MI D : WhenMI D ishighlighteadm , ildcompres Dolbysurround . andoutputlevelsettingswhileitaddsthepowerof a sionwillbeapplied , mull1bandparametriecqualizetro smoothoutthefre In the5 , 1 configurationy , oumayselecttheLogic7 / MA X : WhenMAX ishighlighteda , moresevere quencysettingsforoptimasl oundreproduction . 5.1 Musicor CinemaT . heyworkbestwithlwochan - compressioanlgorithmwillbeapplied . Inadditionto makingsystemsetupquickandeasy , nelmusic , surround - encodepdrogramsor standard EzSet / EQis moreprecisethanmanuasl eltingsW . ith WerecommendthatyouselecttheMI D settingas lwochannepl rogramminogf anytype , respectively . EzSet / EQyouareableto calibratayoursystemina a startingpointandchangeto theMAX settinglatar , Seepage34 fora completeexplanatioonf the fractionof thetimeitwouldtaketo enterthesettings ifdesired . LogicY modes . manua , ya , ndwithrosultathatrivalthoseachievedwith TheNightmodemayalsobeadjusteddirectlyany expensivetestequipmenatndtimeconsumingproce OntheD SP ( SU RR ) menut , heselection timea DolbyDigitasl ourceisplayingby pressing duresT . heendresultisa systemcalibrationprofile choicesmadewiththe _ / • NavigationButton the NightModeButton _ . Whenthebuttonis thatenablesyournewreceivetro deliverthebestpos ontheremoteselectfromoneof theDSPsurround pressedD , - R AN GE willappearinthelowerthird siblesoundnomattewr hattypeof speakersyouhave modesthatamdesignedforusewithtwochannel of thevideoscreenandintheLower DisplayLine or whatthedimensionosf yourlisteningroomare . stereoprogramsto croatea varieS / osf oundfieldpre _ lj . Pressthe A / V NavigationButton _ within sentationsT , hechoicesavailableareHall1 , Hail2 or Werecommendthatyoutakeadvantageof thepreci 3 secondsto selectthedesiredsetting . TheateTT . heHallandTheatermodesareavailablein sionof EzSeVEQto calibrateyoursystem , butif bothfive andsix - channevlerisionsd , ependingon desiredyoumayalsomakeanyof theconfiguration Whenallsettingsforthesurroundsetuphavebeen yoursystemconfigurationS . eepage34 fora com - seltingsmanuallyo , rtrimtheseltingsprovidedby madep , ressthe _ , / ' v " NavigationButton pleteexplanatioonf theDSPsurroundmodes . EzSet / EQbyfollowingtheinstructionosnpages26 31 sothatthe • cursoris nextto B AC K T0 MA ST ER ME NU , andpresstheSet Button BeforestartingtheEzSeVEQprocessm , akecertain OntheS TE RE 0 menut , heselectionchoices to roturnto the MASTER MENU . thatyouhaveconnectedallspeakersforyoursystem madewiththe _ / • NavigationButton _ onthe andthatyouhaveboththeEzSeYEQmicrophonaend Onthe DTS menu , theselectionchoicesmadewith remotemayeitherturnoffall processinagndbass theextenderrodhandy . Ifyouhavea standardcamera the , / • NavigationButton _ ontheremoteare managementotta traditionatlwochannesl tereo tripod , attachtheextenderrodto thetripod , andthen determinedbya combinatioonf thetypeof program presentationse ; lecta stereooutputwithbass screwthemicrophonteo thetopof therod . Placethe materiailn useandwhethetrhe5 . 1 or 6.1 / 7.1 managemenot ; r selecta 5 CH S T E RE 0 and tripodat yourprimarylisteningpositiona , t leastthree channeclonfiguratioins inuse . 7 CH ST ER E0 mode , dependingonhowmany feetfromthenearosstpeakerandadjustit sothat speakersareavailableT . hesetwomodesfeeda two microphonies at leastthreefeetaboveearlevel . If Whena DTSsourceis playingt , hechoiceof modes channepl resentatiotno allspeakersS . eepage34 for youdo nothavea tripod , simplyscrewtheextender for 7.1 systamswillvaryaccordingto thetypeof a completeexplanatioonf thestereomodes .
Page: 24

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION rodintothebottomof theEzSeVEOmicrophone . sothatthecursoris pointingto MAN UA L and WARNING ! ! thenpresstheSetButton qi _ iJW . hentheinterim Next , plugthemicrophoneintotheEzSet / EQ Durimg measurememt messagescreenappearsto remindyouto setthe Please maimtaim silemce MicrophoneJack [ ] locatedbehindthe Front While severml loud sound crossoversm , akesurethatthecursoris poinl _ ntgo PanelControl Doorl _ l . Themicrophonceableis bursts are heard , C0 NT I N UE andpresstheSetButton approximate2ly0 feetlong , whichshouldaccommo START _ _ ON againsinceyouhavealreadysetthecrossovers . datemostlisteningroomsituatbnsI . f requiredy , ou BACK TO EZSET / EQ MENU BACK TO MASTER MENU mayuseanoptionael xtensioncablea , vailableat most Step 3 . TheFAR FIELD MEASURE screen electronicsstoresf , or useinlargerrooms . Howeveh ( FigureS ) willappeawr ithinsl ] uctiontso placethe werecommendthatyoumakeeveryeffortto avoid microphoneif , youhavenotalreadydoneso . This F _ gu9le usingextensionco _ dsforthemicrophonceableas screenis alsotheplaceto setthemastervolume theymayadverselayffectthetestresalts . level . Asnotedonthescreenu , setheVolume IMPORTANNTOTE : Anyonewithhearingthatis sen Control _ ' lql ] _ to adjustthevolumelevelto sitiveto loudnoisasshouldleavetheroomat this Youarenewreadyto starttheEzSet / EQprocessby 28dB , asshownonthelinethatappearsat the followingthesesteps : point , or useearprotectionsufficientto reducethe bottomof themenuwhenthevolumeisadjusted . noiselevelattheirears . Inexpensivfeoam - stjleear Step 1 . Navigateto theEZSET / EQ MODE PresstheSet Button _ whenthevolumeis set plugsa , vailablaet mostdrugstores , maybeusedto menu ( Fig . 7 ) by firstpressingtheOSDButton to theproperlevel , reducethesoundlevelto a tolerablelevelforanyone ontheremote . Pressthe • NavigationButton f whohasa problemwithloudnoiseI . f youareuncom - untilthe . - ) cursoris pointingto E ZS ET / E Q in FAR FIELD MEASURE fortablewith , orcannottolerateloudsoundsanddo Place microphone 3ft / lm theMAS TE R MEN U . PresstheSetButton above ear level at netusesomesortof earpmtecllonwestronglyrec to bringthemenuto thescreen . liste _ i _ g position _ at ommendthatyouleavetheroomandasksomeone le _ t 3 ft / _ m aw _ y from f the closest speaker , elseto bepresenwt hiletheEzSet / EQprocesstakes EZSET / EQ MODE Set volume to _ 2 & dS CONTINUE placeo , rthatyoudo netuseEzSet / EQandenterthe AUTOMATIC BACK TO EZSET / EQ MODE MANUAL configuratiosnettingsmanuallya , sdescribedonpages BACK TO MASTER MENU VOLUME ! _ 2 & WB 26through31 . SACK TO MASTER MENU Step 5 . At thispointyouwillbeginto heara seriesof F _ gur8e testtonescirculateamongallthespeakersinyour systemW . hilethisis happeningth , eAVR435 is read Step4 . ThefinalmenuscreenbeforetheEzSeVEQ ingthesignatlo determinewhichspeakerposiSons processstartsis awarningscreen ( Figure9 ) that areactive , whatb / peof speakeris presenat t each _ gure7 servesas a remindetro keeptheroomasquietas activepositionw , hatthedistanceisfromthelistening possiblewhilethesystemis inuse . Extraneounsoise posiSotno eachspeakeTa , ndto beginto buildapm Step2 . Selectoneof thetwo optionsshownbased of anykindmayadverselayffecttheaccuracyof the fileoftheimpactof he room'sacousticosnhe quality onthewayyouwishto havethesystemsettings system'sresultsD , onottalkwhilethetesttonesare entered : of audioreproductionW . henthetestis completedyou circulatinga , ndif possibletu , rnoffanyventihllensys willhearthetonesstop , andthesystemwillpausefors • Inmostcases , youwillwantto usetheAutomatic ternsifthenoiseformtheair flowis loudenoughfor longasa minutewhiletheprocessomr akesitscalcu modew , hichcalibratetshesystemforspeakerpres youto hea _ S . houldanoutsidenoisesuchasa phone lationsD . onotbealarmedifthe " WARNINGm " essage once , speaker " size " s , peakercrossovecr , hannel ringingoccurduringthetestprocessw , e recommend remainsonthescreenaftertonesstopuntila results outputlevel , speaker - tolistenedr elaytimeand thatyourerunEzSeVEQTh . isscreenis alsoyour messageis displayeadsshownin Step6 or 7 , below . roomequalizatioTn , ochoosethismodesimply remindetrhatthetesttonesusedbyEzSet / EQare NOTEW : hilethesetestsdetectwhethera speakeris presstheSetButtonqi _ iPa , sthecursoris already somewhaltoud . Anyonewithsansillvehearingshould pointingto Automaticwhenthemenuappearson connectedto a particulaorulput , theycannotdeter leavetheroomor usehearingprotecSobneforemov thescreen . minewhetherthespeakeris inthecorrectposition . ingto thenextstep . Ifyoudo notwishto startthetest ( Forexampleit , cantellwhethear speakeirs connected processatthistime , presstheA / • Navigation • Ifyouwishto enterthespeakecrrossovefrrequencies to theSurroundRightoutput , butitcannottellwhether Button _ to returnto eithertheEzSeVEQmenu yourselfb , utwantto havetheEzSeVEQsystemtest thespeakeris ontherightor leftsideof yourlistening ortheMasterMenua , ndpresstheSetButton qi _ i _ . for andcalibratealltheotherfunctionslistedabove , room . ) Forthatreasonw , estronglyrecommendthat TobegintheEzSet / EQNearFieldmeasurements , pressthe • NavigationButton _ to pointthe youtry to listenasthetonecirculatesm , atchingthe pressthe , _ / _ , NavigationButton _ so that cursoraBtACK TO MASTER MENU and nameshownforeachchannetlo thelocationof the 0 N ishighlightedinreversevideoa , ndpressthe thenpresstheSetButtonqi _ i _ . At thelViastar speakerI . fa toneis heardtom a speakerpositionthat Set Button _ . Menu , pressthe • NavigationButton _ again doesnetmatchtheonscreenmessagem , akea note sothatthecursoris pointingto MA NU AL NOTE : OncetheEzSet / EQprocessstarts , thevolume of theincorrecst peakerconnectionsW . henthetest S ET UP andthenpresstheSetButtonqi _ . controal ndStandby / Osffwitchesaretemporarildyis processstopsyouwillseea messageindicatingthe Oncethe MANUAL SETUP menu ( Fig . 16 ) abledwhilethetestsarein progressD , onotadjustthe theyFarFieldmeasuremenatsrecompleteb , utsince appearsf , ollowtheinstructionosn page28 to enter volumeorturntheunitoffunSylouseetheon - screen thereisa connecSeenrrorpressthe • Navigation yourdesiredseffingsfortheCrossoveFr requencies , messagechangeto indicatethatEzSWEQis finished . Button _ so thattheon screencursorinFig . 7 is andthenreturnto theE ZS ET / E Q M0 DE pointitnogRETURN TO MASTER MENU menu . Pressthe • NavigationButton _ again
Page: 25

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Step7b . Insomecasest , hesystemmaynotfunction Step 9 . Youwillnowseea Warningmessage andpresstheSetButton qi _ i _ A . t thispoint , exitall properlydueto overlyhighoutputlevelsW . henthis similarto theoneshownin Figure7 exceptthatitwill menusandturnthereceiveorft Checkallspeaker wireconnectionasndthenrerunEzSet / EQ . occurs , youwillseethemessageshownin Figure12 . containanoptionto rel _ rnto theN EA R FI EL D If youseethismessageverifythatthatthemicrophone E Q S EL EC T menu ( Figure13 ) aswellasthe Step6 . WhentheFarFieldtestsarecompleteames is inthecorrectpositiona , ndnottoocloseto any abilityto returnto theMAS T E R MEN U . If you sagescreenwillappeatro confirmif theprocedure onespeakerT . henpresstheSet Button _ to go arereadyto proceedwiththetest , makecertainthat wassuccesduol rnot . Inmostcasestherewillnotbe backto theMAS T ER MEN U . Fromthere , return themicrophoneis properlypointedtowardthespeaker anyproblemsandyouwillseethemessageshownin to theEzSeVEQsystemandwhenyouareonceagain selectedfor calibrationp , ressthe _ , Navigation Figure10onyourscreen . Ifthespeakerpositions atthe FAR FIELD MEASURE screen , Button _ sothat 0 N is highlighteadndpressthe shownmatchtheactualspeakerlayoutinyoursys reducethesystemvolumelevelby3dB beforetrying Set Button _ . tern , presstheSet Button _ to completeEzSet / EQ EzSeVEQagain . byperformingtheNearFieldMeasurementCso . ntinue Step 10 . Onesho _ ttestsignawl illbesentto the the EzSeVEQprocessby presaintgheSet Button I " speakerpositionbeingcalibratedandaftera slight EZSET / EQ ERROR pausefrothesystemto calculatethetestresults , to taketheNearFieldmeasuremenftrsomthe Am overload detected , youwillseeeithera " NearFieldCompletem " essage frontleft , centerandrightspeakersB . ytakingthis Please verify mic positiom , or a " NearFieldError " messageIn . mostcasest , he sapa _ atseetof measurementtsh , eAVR435 isableto Reduce the volume by completeitsviewof theroom'ssonicsignatureand " Completem " essagewillappea _ i , nwhichcaseyou 3 dR and repeat the procedure , applyequalizatioans neededto correctspikesand shouldproceedto Step11 , ifan " Error " message dipsinthesystem'sresponseC . ontinuetheseinstruc appearsg , oto Step12 . RACK TO MASTER MENU tionswithStepS . Step 11 . Ifthetestresultsweresuccessfutlh , erues f sageshowninFigure14winappea _ I . norderto prop FAR FIELD CONPLETE Figure12 erlycalibratethesystemy , ouwillneedto runtheNear Detected speaker ¢ onfig Fieldtestsfor allthreefrontchannesl peakers ( left , FL ! YES SBR : YES Step 8 . WhentheFarFieldmeasuremenatsrecorn CEN ! YES SBL : YES centerandright ) A . fterrunningthetestforthefront FR ! YES SL : YES pleted , thesystemwillaskyoub takethreeNear leftspeakerm , akecertainthatthecursoris pointing SR : YES SUB : YES Fieldmeasurementosn , eat eachfrontspeakerposi towardsBACK TO NEAR FIELD andpresa DO NEAR FIELD tion . ThesemeasuremenetsnableEzSet / EQto pro theSetButton qi _ iPW . henyouaretakenbackto the RACK TO MASTER MENU ducethemostaccurateset _ ngsfor bothhighandlow NearFieldSelectmenu ( Figure13 ) whereyoushould frequenceyqualizationT . heNearFieldmeasurements repeaSt tepsSthrough11 untilallthreefrontspeak aresimilarto theFarFieldtests , exceptthatthesys ershavebeencalibratedW . henthatis donethe ternwill " listen " to onlyonespeakerata time , rather Step7a . Ifthemeasuremenatsrenotsuccesdudl ue EzSet / EQprocessiscompleteandyoushouldpress thansendingthetestsignalsto allspeakersin rota - to a missingor malfunctioninsgpeakert , heF AR the • NavigationButton _ to rel _ rnto the tion . Atthe NEAR FIELD EQ SELECT MasterMenu . F I EL D E Q ER R0 R messagewillappearas menu ( Figure13 ) , youwillseeaninstructionto place shownin Figure11 . EzSeVEiQs programmedto look f themicrophoneina differenpt ositionthantheone NEAR FIELD COMPLETE for speakerpairsat thefrontlefYfronrtight , surround usedfor theinitiaFl arFieldmeasurementTsh . istime , leff / surmundrightandsurroundbackleft / surround EZSET / EQ has success _ placethemicrophonceloseto thespeakerto be Fully performed backrightpositionsI . fthetestresultsindicatethatone , Near Field Eq for measureda , t a distanceof about3 feet . In addition , butnotbothofthespeakersin anyof thesepairsis the selected speaker , thetopof themicrophoneshouldbepointedtowards presentt , hemenuwillshowNOnextto thespeaker BACK TO NEAR FIELD thespeakerr , atherthanpointingupaswasdonefor positionwherethetestsdidnotrepotsbackthata BACK TO MASTER MENU theFarFieldtests . Forthefirstmeasuremenpt , lace speakeris presentS . houldthismessageappearm , ake themicrophonseo thatit iscloseto , and noteof thesuspecst peakerlocatione , xitallmenus pointingtowardst , hel _ ontleftspeakera , ndwith andturnthereceiveorff . Checkallspeakerwirecon - Figur _ 14 theonscreen . e , cursorpointingto 1 . FL nectionsandthenrerunEzSWEQ . SP EA KE R , andpresstheSetButton qi _ iJ . Step 12 . Ifa " NearFieldError " messagaeppearsa , s FAR FIELD EQ ERROR Detected speaker ¢ onfig showninFigure15 , youshouldcheckto makecertain NEAR FIELD EQ SELECT FL ! YES SBR : YES thatthemicrophoneisaboutthreefeetfromthe CEN ! YES SRL : YES Please select FR _ YES SL : YES speakerbeingtestedandthatthetopof themicro 41 , FL Speeker SR _ NO SUB : YES 2 , C Speaker Verify spkr con _ ections phoneunitis pointingtowardsthespeakeTY . oumay 3 , FR Speaker Verify mic position alsohaveto raiseor lowerthemastervolumeto Reduce background noise BACK TO RASTER MENU DAEK TO MASTER MENU achieveaccuratereadingsA . ftercheckingthesetwo itemsa , sneeded , makecertainthatthecursoris pointingto theBACK TO NEAR FIELD F _ gur1e1 lineandpresstheSetButton q _ i _ . Thiswillreturn Figure13 youto the NEAR FIELD EQ SELECT menu ( Figure13 ) whereyoushouldrepeatSteps8 through11 , adjustingthemikeplacemenatndvolume
Page: 26

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION f _ bvelasneededunfiltheN EA R FI EL D SpeakerSetup MANUAL SETUP C0 MPL ET E menu ( Figure14 ) appearsafter AlthoughusingEzSeVEQto enterthesettingsfor EZSET EQ : OFF _ thetesttonestops . EZSET ADJUST speaker " size " andcrossoveproint , youmaywishto SPEAKER SIZE makechangesto thosesettingso , r to manualleynter SPEAKER XOVER NEAR FIELD ERROR DELAY ADJUST a completaspeakerprofibforyoursystemI . naddi CNANNEL ADJUST Near Field Eq _ as not tion , forsystemswhereyouwithto haveseparate successful , BACK TO MASTER MENU speakerconfiguratiosnettingsfor eachinput , rather Please check mi ¢ Placement and volume thanusethesamesettingsforallinputsy , oumayalso Setting configurethatoptioninthesemenusT . _ , vsoeparate _ BACK TO NEAR FIELD £ jure 16 BAEK TO MASTER NENU menusare usedto enterthisinformationa , ndyou maychangethedataoneitheror both , as needed . If youhavealreadyruntheEzSet / EOcalibrallonsys The SPEAKER SIZE menutellstheAVR F _ gul1e5 tam , thefirstlineof themenuenablesyouto hear aboutthebassreproductiocnapabilitieosf your thedifterencebelweenthesettingsestablishebdy speakersT . his , inturn , determinews hichspeakers WhenboththeFarFieldandNearFieldmeasurements EzSet / EQT . hedefaultsettingis 0 N , whichplaysthe receivebassinformatiotnhatisderivedfromaudio havebeensuccessfullcyompletedyoursystemis incomingsourcewiththeEzSeVEQsettingsT . ohear tracksor specificalliyntendedfor reproductiobny readytot use . Thanksto EzSeVEQth , esettingsfor thesystemina Bypassmodew , ithnoneof theequal - lowfrequencycapablespeakersbytheuseofa low - speaker " size " , speakercrossovecr , hanneol utputand izationfiltersinthecircuitpath , pressthe _ / _ . frequencyeffects ( " LFE " c ) hanneilndigitalprogram individuaclhannedl elaytimehavebeenautomatically NavigationButton _ so that0 F F is highlighted . sourcesh , additionb , ytellingtheAVRwhethesrpeakers setandrequirenofurtheradjuslTnenint , addition , Notethatoncechangedt , hissettingwillremainuntil areavailablfeor theSurroundBackchannelsth , e EzSet / EQalsoperformsa completeroomequalization youchangeit againinthismenuW . hileyoumaywant intormafioonnthismenuis usedto determinewhich thattailorsthesystem'spetfformancfoerthebestpos to usethismenuoptionto hearthedifferencethat surroundmodesmaybeused ( e . g . m , odessuchas siblesoundwithyourcombinationof speakerss , peak - EzSet / EQmakesw , erecommendthatyouleavethe DobyDigitaEl X , DobyProLogicllx , or DTSES , erplacemenatndroomacousticsT . henextfewpages settingonto takeadvantageof thebenefitsof requiringSBL / SBRspeakersa , reonlyavaihblewhen inthismanuadl etailtheprocedumfor manualleynter EzSet / EQa'sdvancedroomcorrectiontechnology . a speakeris presenitn thosechannels ) . ingsystemdata , butunlessyouwantto viewtheset TheE ZS ET A Dd UST lineonthemenu The SPEAKER X - OVER menuis usedtofur ringinformallonandmakeanadjustmenyt , ouarenow enablesyouto setthesystem'sTilt , orhighJrequency readyto enjoythefinestinhometheaterandmusic thertailorthebassmanagemenstystembydetermin boost . Tomakethisadjustmenfti , rst makesurethat reproducSoGn . oto page32 forcompleteinformation ingthefrequencieastwhichbassinformatioins sent EZ SE t EQ lineissetto 0 N , as thisitemis not onoperatingyourA \ / R435 , to a specificspeakerpositionT . hismenualsocontains availablwe henEzSeEt Qis notin thesignalpath . settingsto routeLFEinformatioanndto setthesub Whenthecursoris ontheE Z S ET A D J US T Manual Setup wooferhighpassfilterordek line , presstheSetButtonqi _ ii _ a , ndthenpressthe inmostcasesitis simplere , asiear ndmoreaccurate _ / _ . NavigationButton _ to enterthedesired Toconfigurethespeakersin yoursystemforusewith to letEzSeVEQtakecareof enteringthesystem settingW . henyouhavecompletedyouradjustment , theA \ / R435 , or to checkthesettingsenteredby parameterfsorspeaker " size " s , peakecrrossover , pressthe _ . NavigationButton _ to movethe EzSWEQc , heckthesettingsonthevarioussub - menu channeol utputandindividuaclhannedl elaytime . cursordownto the BACK TO MANUAL groupsonthe MAN UA L SE T U P menu , stalng Howeverif , youfeelthatyourlisteningroomor system SE TU P lineandpresstheSet Button _ . withthe SP EA KE R SI Z E menu ( Figure17 ) componentasrebestsuitedto manuael ntryof these andthenchecktheothermenuss ' ettingsT . odothis , NoteonManualSetupMenus : Eachof thefour seltingst , heAVR435 alsoabws youto enteror tim goto theManuaSl etupMenu ( Figure16 ) by first majormanuasl etupmenus ( SpeakeSr ize , Speaker anyof thesetraditionaslystemparametersE . venifyou pressingtheOSDButton _ to recalltheMaster CrossoveDr , elayAdjustandChanneAl djust ) includes domakethesettingsmanuallyw , e recommendthat Menu ( Figure1 ) . Next , pressthe _ / _ , Navigation a linethatreadsE Z S ET SE T T I N GS When yourunthe EzSeVEtQestsfirstsothata baselineset - Button _ untilthecursoris onthe MA NU AL thedefaultsettingof 0 F F isshownyouareableto tingis establisheda , ndthenmakeyouradjuslments S ET UP lineonthemenuin useandpresstheSet makeanyrequiredadjustmenttshatareavaibbbon fromthen . NotethatonceEzSeVEQhasbeenrunyou Buttonqi _ iJW . hentheMANUAL SETUP thatmenu . Howevery , oumaychangethesettingto donotneedto adjusat llsystemsettingso , nlythose Menuisshown , pressthe _ / _ , NavigationButton 0 N at anytimeto recalltheset _ ngsestablishewdhen thatyouwantto adjust . againuntilthecursoris ontheS PE AK ER EzSet / EQwaslastrun . It isalsoimpoltantto notethat Toviewor changethecurrentsettingsp , ressthe S I Z E lineandpresstheSet Buttonqi _ iL whentheEzSet / EQsettingsareinuse , theA \ / Rwill OSDButton _ ontheremoteto bringupthe notallowanychangesto bemadeT . otrimthesettings SPEAKER SIZE MA St E R ME NU ( Figure1 ) . Next , pressthe • LEFT / RIGHT : pressthe _ / _ . NavigationButton _ untilthecur CENTER : NavigationButton _ asneededuntilthecursoris sorisontheEZSET SETTINGSIineon SURROUND : onthe MA NU AL S ET UP line . PresstheSet SURR BACK : _ _ . themenuinuseandpressthe _ / _ . Navigation SUB MODE : Button _ to viewtheMANUAL SETUP SUB SIZE : Button _ to changethesettingto OFF . Thiswill EZSET SETTINGS : _ ON menu ( Figure16 ) , allowyouto makechangesto thesettingsonthat BACK TO MANUAL SETUP menu .
Page: 27

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Onthe SPEAKER SIZE menu ( Figure17 ) . thismenu . bassand / orLFEinformatiomnayalsobe theAVR435 ' s processingsystemto configurethe directedto thesubwoofe _ . youwillseeeitherthefactorydefaultsettingsor . if unitforeither5 . 1 or 6.1 / 7.1 operation . EzSeVEQhasbeenrun . theseftingsrecordedbythe Whenyouhavecompletedyourselectiontorthefront Pressthe _ / _ . NavigationButton _ onthe testresults ] . nthecasefor themainspeakerchannels . channelp , ressthe • NavigationButton _ onthe remoteto selecttheoptionthatbestdescribetshe eachspeakerposition ( trentleft / right , centers , urround remoteto movethecursorto CEN T ER . speakersin useattheleftandrightbacksurround left / righat ndsurroundbackleft / righty ) ouhavethe positionsbasedonthedefinitionosnthispage : optionof tellingthesystemifthespeakersusedare Pressthe _ / _ - NavigationButton _ onthe " small " or " large'Tt hesedescriptiondsonotdescribe remoteb selecttheoptionthatbestdescribeysoursys WhenN0 NE isselectedt , hesystemwilladjustso theactualphysicaslizeof thespeakersb , utrather tem . basedonthespeakedrefinitionsshownbelow thatonly5 . 1 channeslurroundprocessing / decoding referto thetypeof speakerF . oreachoftheseset - modesareavailablaendthesurroundbackamplifier tings , selectL A RGE whenthespeakersina paMb WhenSMAL L isselectedl , owfrequenccyenter channelswillnotbeused . Whenthisis thecasefor uhr positionamtraditionaful llrangeloudspeakers . channesloundswillbesentonlyto thesubwoofeorut yoursystemy , oumaywishto takeadvantageof the UsetheSMALL seftlngforsmallert , mquencylimited put . ] fyouchoosethisoptionandthereisnosubwoofer availabilitoyf thisamplifierchannepl airfor usein pew " satellites " peakersthatdonotreproducesounds connectedy , ouwillnothearlowfrequencsyoundsf _ om eringa secondsetof speakersthathavetheirsource thecenterchannel . below60Hz . Inallcasesexceptthefrontleft / right selectedby theAVR435 ' s multiroomcontrosl ystem . speakersyoumayalsoselectN 0 N E . Thistellsthe Seepage41for moreinformafion . WhenL ARGE isselecteda , full rangesignawl illbe systemthatnospeakersarepresenat t thepartbular sentto thecenterspeakeroutputa , ndNOcenter positiona , llowingtheAVRto selectthecorrectsur WhenSMAL L is selectedt , hesystemwilladjustso channeslignawl illbesentto thesubwoofeorutput . roundmodesthatarecompatiblweiththenumber thatthetuncomplemeonft6 . 1 / 7.1surrounpdrocessing / of speakersinstalledF . orexamplein , orderto use decodingmodesareavailablea , ndlowfrequency WhenN0 NE is selectedn , osignalswillbesentto the DolbyDigitaEl X . DolbyProLogicIIx . DTSES informatiobnelowthecrossoveprointwillbesentto thecenterchanneol utputT . hereceivewr inoperatein Logic7 / 7 channeal nd7 Stereomodesy , oumust thesubwoofeorutput . If youchoosethisoptionand a " phantomc " enterchanneml odeandcenterchannel haveeitherLargeor Smalsl peakersenteredasthe themisnosubwoofecronnectedy , ouwillnothear informatiown illbesentto theleftandrightfrontchan - settingfortheSurroundBackchannels . anylowfrequencsyoundsfromthesurroundback neloutputsW . henonlyfrontleftandrightspeakerasre channels . used . withnocenteror surroundspeakersD . olby If youareindoubtasto whichsettingbestdescribes VirtuaSl peakeirs a goodalternativme ode . yourspeakercsonsultthespecificationinsthespeakers ' WhenL A RGE is selectedt , hesystemwilladjustso owner'smanualv , isitthespeakermanufacturerw'seb thatthefullcomplemenotf 6.1 / 7.1 surroundprocess Whenyouhavecompletedyourselectionfor thecen siteoraskthedealerorinstallerhamwhomyoupur ing / decodingmodesareavailablea , nda full - range terchannelp , ressthe • NavigationButton _ on chasedthespeakers . signawl illbesentto thesurroundbackchannelsw , ith theremoteto movethecursorto S URR 0 UN D . nolow - frequenciyntormafiosnentto thesubwoofer Beginyourchangesto thespeakesretupprocess Pressthe _ / _ - NavigationButton _ ontheremote output . bymakingcertainthatthecursoris po [ nti % at the to selecttheopfionthatbestdescribetshesurround L EF T / R I GHT linew . hichsetstheconfigurafion Whenyouhavecompletedyourselectiontorthe speakersinyoursystembasedonthespeaker for thef _ ontleftandughtspeakersIf . youwishto make backsurroundchannelsp , ressthe • Navigation definitionsshownonthispage . a changeto thefrontspeakersc'onfiguratiopnr , essthe Button _ ontheremoteto movethecursotro , / _ , NavigationButton _ sothateitherL AR GE SUB MODE . WhenSMA L L is selectedl , owfrequencysurround or SMA L L appearsm , atchintgheappropriate channesloundswillbesentto thesubwoofeor utput descriptiofnromthedefinifionsshownabove . Pressthe _ / _ - NavigationButton _ onthe only . Ifyouchoosethisoptionandthereis nosub remoteto selecttheoptionthatbestdescribeysour wooferconnectedy , ouwillnothearanylowfrequency IMPORTANNTOTE : Ifa changeis madeto this . or system . soundsfromthesurroundchannels . anyspeakerpositionw , henyoupressthe , / _ - NavigationButton qi ] _ , anon screenwarningmes Thechoicesavailablfeorthesubwoofepr osiSownill WhenL AR GE is selecteda , fuN - rangseignal sagewMaIppearremindingyouthatEzSeVEQmustbe dependonthesettingsfor theotherspeakersp , articu willbesentto thesurroundchanneol utputsa , nd run . Thisisnecessartyo integratethechangedparam larlythefrontleft / righpt osiSons . NOsurroundchannesl ignalswillbesentto the eterwiththeEzSet / EQtestresultsM . akealldesired subwoofeorutput . Ifthefrontleft ! righst peakemaresetto S MA L L . settingchangesontheS PEA KE R SE TU P and thesubwoofewr illautomaticallbyesetto SUB . SP EA KE R X - 0 VE R menusonce . andthen WhenN0 N E isselecteds , urroundsoundinforma - whichis the " on " position . runEzSet / EQafterallmanuaal djustmentasrecorn tionwillbesplitbelweenthefrontleftandfrontright pleted . outputsF . oropfimapl erformancwehennosurround Ifthefrontleft ! rightspeakemaresetto L AR GE . speakersareinuse . theDolbyVirtuaSl peakemr ode WhenSII AL L is selectedlo , wfrequencsyoundswill threeoptionsareavailable : shouldbeused . besentonlyto thesubwoofeorutputI . fyouchoosethis , , If nosubwoofeirs connectedto theAVR435 . opfionandthereisnosubwootecronnectedy , ouwill Whenyouhavecompletedyourselectionfsor the pressthe _ / _ - NavigationButton _ onthe nothearanylowfrequencsyoundsfromthefront mainsurroundchannelsp , ressthe • Navigation channels . remotesothatN 0 N E appearsintheon - screen Button _ ontheremoteto movethecursorto menuW . henthisoptionis selecteda , llbassinfor SU RR B AC K . Thislineservestwofunctions : WhenL A RGE is selecteda , fullrangesignawl illbe nationwillberoutedto thefrontleft / righ " tmain " It notonlyconfiguresthesettingforthesurround sentto thefrontlettandfrontrightoutputsD . epending speakers . onthechoicemadeinthe SUB W0 0 FE R linein backchannelws hentheyarepresenti ; t alsotells
Page: 28

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION • Ifa subwoofeirs connectedto theAVR435 , you speaker'sinternallowfrequencydrivehasopposedto thatis identicatlo theinformatiofnorthespeakerso , r havetheoptionto havethefrontleft / right " main " themid4angedriverT : hesettingsontheSP KR X - ifanexactmatchis notpossiblep , icktheclosest speakersreproducebassfrequencieast alltimes , 0 V ER menualsoallowyouto setthehighpassfilter choicethatisABOVEthespeaker'slowfrequencylimit andhavethesubwoofeorperateonlywhenthe thatdeterminews hichfrequenciegsoto thesubwoofer or crossoveprointto avoidthecreationof a low AVB435 is beingusedwitha digitalsourcethat whentheAVB435 is playingbackthelowQequency frequency " hole " whereyoursystemwillhaveno bassinformation . containsa dedicatedlowfrequenceyffects , orLFE effects ( LFEc ) hanneflroma digitasl oundl _ ack . soundt _ acTkh . isallowsyouto usebothyourmain Beforemakinganychangesto thesettingsonthisdis Whenanyneededadjustmentasremadeto the andsubwoofesrpeakersto takeadvantageof the play , wesuggestthatyoufindthecrossoveprointfor crossovemo , neadditionaal djustmenist availableto speciabl asssoundsc _ eatedforsomemovies . thespeakersineachof thefourgroupingsa , ndthe customtailorthewayinformatioins sentto thesub Press , / _ , NavigationButton _ onthe highesftrequencyhandledbyyoursubwoofear swell woofekThe L F E L P F L T lineadjuststhefre remoteso thatSU B ( L FE ) appearsinthe astheo _ derof itsfilterslopef , rontleft ! rightc , enter quencycutoffof thelowpassfilterthatdeterminetshe onscreenmenu . front , surroundandsurroundback , bylookingat the frequencyatwhichintormatioins sentto thesub • Ifa subwoofeirs connectedandyouwishto useit specificationpsageof eachspeaker'sowner'smanual , wooferwhenplayinga digitasl oundtractkhathasa forbassreproductioinnconjuncfiown iththemain bygettingthatintormafiofnromthespeakermanufac dedicatedlowfrequencyeffectschannelI . nmost frontleft / righst peakersr , egardlesosf theb / peof turer'sWebsite , or bycontactingyourdealerorthe casesthedefaultfrequencyof 120Hzis appropriate , programsourceorSurroundmodeyouarelisten manufacturerc'sustomesrervicedepartmenYt . ouwill sincethatis thefrequencmy ostcommonlyusedin ingto , pressthe , / _ , NavigationSutton _ on needthesefiguresto accuratelcyonfigurethenext thecreationof LFEchanneldsuringa movie'ssound theremotesothatS UB L / R + L F E appears groupof settings . mixingprocessH . owevery , oumaywishto changethe intheon - screenmenuW . henthisoptionis select settingbasedonyourindividuapl _ eferencoerthe Notethatwhenanyspeakergroupotherthanthefront ed , afull4angesignawl illbesentto thefront characteristicasndcapabilifieosf yoursubwoofer . left / righ " tmain " speakersa , ndthesubwoofewr ill left / righst peakersissetto L AR GE , thecrossover TochangethissettingwhentheS PE AK ER receiveLFEinformatioanndthebassfrequencies maynotbeadlusteda , stheteedwillbefulI - Tange , X - 0 VE R menuis onthescreenp , ressthe _ , / T undertheselectedcrossoveproint . withnosoundbeingderivedforthesubwoofeart NavigationButton _ untilthecursorisonthe thatposition , Aftermakinganyrequiredchangesto theSubwoofer L F E L P F L T lineandthenpressthe _ / _ , Modeline , pressthe _ , / T NavigationButton Tomakechangesto thespeakercrossoverosr LFE NavigationButton _ untilthedesiredsettingis to movethecursorto theS UB S I Z E line . The high - passfiltersettinggoto theS PK R X - 0 V ER showninhighlightevdideo . submenuwithintheMAN UA L SET UP menu seffingonthislineentersthedataof thesizeof your Whenallchangesto SpeakeCr rossovesrettingshave subwoofer'dsriverso thatthepropergain , filtersand ( Fig . 16 ) . Todothis , firstpresstheOSDButton beenmadep , ressthe , A / ' vNavigation Button equalizatiosneffingswillbeusedwithEzSet / EQ . sothatthe MA ST ER MEN U ( Figure1 ) appears . untilthecursoris ontheB AC K T0 MA NU AL Next , pressthe _ / _ , NavigationButton @ untilthe Tochangethesettingm , akecertainthatthecursoris S ET UP menuandthenpressingtheSetButton cursoris onthe MA NU AL S ET UP lineonthe onthe SU B SI ZE lineandpresstheA / ' v sothatyoumaymakeanyotheradjustments menuin useandpresstheSetButtonqi _ iDW . hen NavigationSutton ql ] _ , sothatthesettingappears to thesystemparametersIt . is alsoimpoMantot theMAN UA L SE T UP menuis shownp , ress thatmatchesthediameteor f yoursubwoofer'dsriver . remembetro reruntheEzSeVEQsystemif any the _ / _ , NavigationButton @ againunfilthe Ifyoudonot remembewr hatthesizeis , youcan changeshavebeenmadeto thesettingsonthis cursorisonthe SPEAKER X - OVER eithermeasurethedriver'sdiameterorconsultthe menuf , ollowingtheinst _ ucfionsshownonpage24 lineandpresstheSetButton _ to viewthe owner'smanuaflorthespeaker : for usingtheManuaml ode , SPKR X - OVER menu ( Figure18 ) . Whenyouhavecompletedthesettingsforspeaker DelaySettings f : _ SPEAKER X - OVER " size " , presstheA / ' v NavigationSutton _ to Dueto thedifferendt istancesbetweenthelistening movethecursorto theBACK TO MANUAL LEFT / RIGHT : posifionandeachspeakerpositiont , heamountof CENTER : SE t UP lineto continueyouradjustmentIst . isalso SURROUND : timeittakesforsoundto reachyourearsfromeach importantto remembetro re runtheEzSWEQsystem SURR BACK : channeils differentY . oumaycompensatfeorthisdif - LFE LP FLT : ifanychangeshavebeenmadeto thesettingsonthis EZSET SETTINGS : _ ON ferencethroughtheuseof thedelayseffingsto adjust menu , followingtheinstructionsshownon page24for SACK TO MANUAL SETUP thetimingforthespeakerplacemenatndacoustic usingtheManuaml ode . conditionsinyourlisteningroomorhometheater . SpeakerCrossoverSetting F _ gum18 Inmostcases , thesetlngsestablishebdyEzSet / EQ Whenallspeaker " size " settingshavebeenmade , areaccurateto undera foot , buttheplacemenotf younowhavetheoptionto takeadvantageof the Tochangetheset1 % foranyof thefourspeaker themicrophoneandotherfactorsmayinfluence AVR435 ' s QuadrupleCrossovesrystemw , hichallows groupsp , resstheA / ' v NavigationButton _ until thesettingS . houldyouwishto manuallaydjustthe individuaclrossovesrettingsto bemadeforeach thecursoris nextto thespeakegrroupwhereyou channedl elaytimes , followtheinstructionsshown speakergroupingT . heIow - f _ equenccryossoveproint wishto makea changeandthenpressthe _ / , belowW . heneveardjustmenttso thedelaysettingsare is setbythedesignof yourspeakersD . ependingon NavigationButton _ untilthedesiredsetting maderemembetrhatthedistancesettingsneednot thedesignanddrivercomplemenotf yourspeakersit , appearsT . heavailablcehoicesfor lowfrequencyintor beaccurateto theinch , asthesystemis designedto is ddinedasthefrequencywhichiseitherthelowest mafionto besentto thesubwooferhatherthanto the accommodataeb / picallisteningarearatherhanthe possiblefrequencythespeakeris capableof repro mainspeakerchannela , re40Hz , 60Hz , SOHz , precisemeasuremenfrtomthespeakersto a specific ducingo , r thefrequencyatwhichsoundissentto the tOOHz1 , 20Hz , 150Hzand200Hz.Pickthechoice " sweest pot " position .
Page: 29

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Inadditionto providingdelayingadjustmentfsoreach settingthatbringsthevideoandsoundbackin sync . pressthe • NavigationButton _ untiltheon - individuaslpeakerpositiont , heA \ / R435 isamongthe screen _ cursorisat theU NI T lineonthemenu . PresstheSetButton _ againto enterthesetting . fewAN receivertshatabNs youto adlustthedelay Then . pressthe , / 1 _ NavigationButton _ so for thecombinedoutputof allspeakersasa group . NotethattheA / VSyncdelaysettingis uniqueto each thatMETE R is highlightedW . henthechange Thisfeatureis calledAN SyncDelay ; itallowsyouto videoinputsources , oyoumayentera differenstet in measuremeunnt itsis madep . ressthe • / • compensatfeor delaysto thevideoimagethatmaybe ringto compensatfeorthedifferencebsetweenany NavigationButton _ b leturnthe . - ) cursorto causedbytheprocessinginproductssuchasdigital producat ttachedto thedifferenitnputs . theF L position . videodisplaysv , ideoscalersd , igitalcableorsatellite Withtheonscreen _ cumorpointingto F L . press systemso , r personavlideorecordersW . ithproper Tochangeoneof theindividuaslpeakerpositions the _ / 1 _ NavigationButton _ untilthedistance adjustmenotf thesettingtorAN SyncDelayy . oucan directlyp , resstheSpeakerSelectButton _ , fromthecenterspeakerto thepreferredlistening eliminatethelossof lipsyncthatmaybecausedby followedbythe • / • NavigationButton _ to positionis enteredN . ext . pressthe • Navigation digitavl ideoapplications . selectthedesiredposillonas thatnameappearsinthe Button _ to movethecursorto the NE XT line on screendisplayandtheLowerDisplayLinelB . andusethe _ / I , , NavigationButton _ againto Tomakeanychangesb thedelaysettingsg , ob the Whenthenameof thespeakerposiSonto beadjusted enterthedistancefromthemainlisteningpositionto DELAY ADJUST submenwuithintheMANUAL appearspresstheSet Button _ within5 seconds . thecenterspeakerR . epeattheprocedureforallactive SE T UP menu ( Figure16 ) . Todothis . firstpress Pressthe , / I , NavigationButton _ to enterthe speakerpositionsfi , rst usingthe • Navigation theOSDButton _ i _ sothatthe MA ST ER desireddelaysetlngforthatspeakerandthenpress Button _ to changeto thenextpositiona , ndthen ME NU ( Figure1 ) appearsN . ext . pressthe usethe _ / 1 _ NavigationButton _ to change , A / • Navigation Button _ untilthecursoris theSetButton _ to enterthesettingT . he • / • thesettingN . otethatonlythespeakerpositionsthat ontheMAN UAL S ET UP lineonthemenu NavigationButton _ maybeusedb select havebeensetto L A RGE or SMAL L inthe inuseandpresstheSet Buttonli _ ii . Whenthe anotherpositiono , r youmaysimplywait5 seconds SPEAKER SETUP menua . s shownon MA NU AL SE TU P menuis shownp , ressthe forthesystemto timeoutandreturnto normal page26 . maybeadjustedT . heappearancoef A / • Navigation Button _ againuntilthecursor operation . threedashesnextto a speakerpositioninplace is onthe DE L A Y AD J U ST lineandpressthe Whenallchangesto theDelaysettingshavebeen of a distancesetlngindicatetshatyouhavenot SetButton _ to viewtheD EL AY A D J US T madepressthe • / • NavigationButton _ until configuredanactivespeakefror thatlocation . menu ( Figuret 9 ) . thecursoris onthe BACK TO MANUAL S ET UP menuandthenpressingtheSetButton Whenthedelaytimeforallspeakerpositionshas DELAY ADJUST sothatyoumaymakeanyotheradjustmenttso - 1 , FL _ 12 ft SBR _ 10 ft beensetyoumayreturnto themanuasletupby CEN ! 12 ft SBL ! 10 ft thesystemparametersIf . thechangesjustmadecorn RR : IB ft SL ! 10 ft pressingthe • / • NavigationButton _ un8lthe SR : 10 ft SUB : 12 ft pletethemanuaal dlustmentnseededp , resstheOSD • - ) cursoris pointingto BA CK T 0 MAN UA L DELAY RESET : _ ON Button _ to exitthemenusystemandresume UNIT : _ METER SE TU P andthenpressingtheSet Buttonli _ ii . A / V SYNC DELAY : OmS normasl ystemoperation . Howeverif , youhavea digitavl ideosourceora digital EZSET SETTINGS : _ ON videodisplaythatcauseslackof lipsyncyoumayuse BACK TB MASTER MENU OutputLevelAdjustment theAN Syncadjustfeatureto delaytheaudiosignal Outputleveladjustmenist a keypartof theconfigura asit issentto a / / channels ( asopposedto theindivid Figure19 tionof anysun - oundsoundproduct . It is particularly ualsettingss ) othatthepictureandsoundambrought importanftor a digitarleceiversuchastheAVR435 , If youareusingthismenuforthefirsttime . pressthe backtogetherW . erecommendthatthisadiuslmenbte ascorrectoutputsensurethatyouhearsoundtmcks • NavigationButton _ to proceedto thenext madeusingthedirectaccesscontrolsontheremote . withtheproperdirectionaliatyndintensity . step . asnoresetis neededH . oweveri . fyouare asshownbelowThatenablesyouto seetheimage returningto thismenuto changethecurrentsettings . whilemakingtheadjustmenth ; owevery : oumayalso Inmostcases , youwillnotneedto makeany youmaywishto resetallchannelsto thefactory adjustithereusingthemenusystem . adjustmenttso theoutputlevel , asthesettings defaultdistancesbeforeenteringnewdata . madebyrunningEzSeVEaQreasaccurateasthose ToadjusttheAA ! Syncdelapyr , essthe • / • Navigation mademanuallyH . owevery . ouareableto usethe Toresetthesettingsm , akecertainthatthecumoris Button _ sothatthe . - ) cusor is pointingto the CHANNEL ADJUST menutothmthesettings ontheD EL AY RE SE T lineandthenpressthe AN SyncDelaylineonthemenuandthenpressthe tosuiytourpemonaplreferenocretsoconfigutrhee , / 1 _ NavigationButtons _ sothat0 N isshown _ / I , NavigationButton _ to delaythesound systemsothattheoutpusteltinagmsdifferfernotm inhighlightevdideoandnotethatthetactorydefaults sufficientlsyothatit matchestheon screenvideo . oneinpustourcteoanotheTLheabiltiotmyakeindi willappearP . ressthe • NavigationButton _ to vidualoutputleveladjustmentosna pepinpubt asisis scrollbackupintothechannellistingsto makeyour Thedelasyettinmgasybeadjustaetdany11meusing usefuflorlistenerswhomaypreferdifferenstettings adjustmentfsollowingtheins11uctiosnhsownabove theremotceontraonldwhilveiewinagnon - screen forthesubwoefeorran individuaclhannegl roupsuch Figure19 . Whenyourfirstset , rigchangeis made . imagebypressingtheDelaySelectButtonl _ il . asthefrontspeakerws henplayingmusicasl elections 0 F F willautomaticalblyehighlightedonthe TheAN SyncDelaysettingisfirst , anditmaybe viatheCDinputas opposedto themoviesoundtmcks DE L A Y R ES ET lineto indicatethatthe adjustedby pressingtheSet Button _ withinfive morefrequentlyusedwiththeDVDinput . Thismenu changehasbeenmade . secondsof whenthe A / V SY NC DE L A Y alsoallowsyouto adjusttheoutputlevelsusing Thedefaultfor distancesettingsonthismenuis in messageappearsin theonscreendisplayandthe externasl ourcessuchas atestdiscorotherprogram Lower DisplayLinei ' _ J . Then . pressthe _ / 1 _ materiatlhatyouuseasa standardr , atherthanthe feet . Ifyourmeasuremenatsreinfeet . proceedto the NavigationButton _ to enterthedesireddelay system'stesttone . nextstep ; ifyourmeasuremenatsremadein meters .
Page: 30

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION IMPORTANNTOTE : Listenersareoftenconfused willstartthetesttonefromthefrontleftspeakerposi - lineandthenpressthe , / , NavigationButton abouttheoperationof thesurroundchannelsW . hile tion , butratherthancirculatingto thenextchannel untilA UT 0 is inhighlightevdideoT . hiswillcause someassumethatsoundshouldalwaysbecoming everyfivesecondsa , sisthecaseintheautomatic thetesttoneto circulateamongallof thechannelfsor fromeachspeakerm , ostof thetimetherewillbelittle modet , heyoumustpresstheA / V Navigation fivesecondsat eachposifion . or nosoundinthesurroundchannelsT . hisis because Button _ to changethechannetlhetesttoneis Asthetesttonecirculatesth , ecursorwillflashand theyareonlyusedwhena moviedirectororsound beingsentto . Whenyouhavecirculatedthroughall movenextto eachpositionto indicatewherethetone mixerspecificallyplacessoundthereto createambE channelsthetesttonewillstop , butyoumayrestartit shouldbecomingfrom . Ifthetoneiscomingfroma ence , a speciael ffector to continueactionfromthe byreturningto 1heT E ST T 0 NE lineagainand differenstpeakerthantheoneindicatedonthemenu frontof theroomto therealWhentheoutputlevels activatingmanuasl equencing . screenturntheAVR435 off usingtheMain Power areproperlyset , it is normalfor surroundspeakers Thefinalopfionfor toneadjustmenutsingthemenu Switch [ ] andcheckthespeakerwiringorconnec to operateonlyoccasionallyA . rtificiallyincreasingthe tionsto externapl oweramplifiersto makecertainthat systemisto notusetheinternatlesttoneat all . Todo volumeto the rearspeakersmaydestroythe illusion eachspeakeris connectedto thecorrectoutputtar this , simplyusetheA / V NavigationButtons of anenvelopingsoundfieldthatduplicatestheway minal . Whenyouhaveverifiedthatallspeakersare to changethechanneal ndthenusethe _ / _ ' youhearsoundina movietheateor rconcerht all , even NavigationButtons _ to changetheoutputlevel . connectedto thecorrectoutputterminalt , urnthe whenmakingmanuaaldjustments , AVR435 backonandreturnto thismenuto resume Whenmakingchanneol utputadjustmentwsithoutthe thechanneal djustmenptrocedureI . fanyspeakercon internatlesttonewestronglyrecommendthatyouuse Beforebeginnintgheoutputleveladjustmenptrocess , nectionswerechangedwealsorecommendthatyou a testdiscin the " repeat " modeonyourDVDor CD makecertainthatallspeakerconnectionhsavebeen rerunEzSeVEQbeforemakinganymanuacl alibration playesr o thatthesignalbeingusedis constant properlymadeT . hes * / stemvolumeshouldbesetto the throughouttheadjustmenptrocess . adjustments . levelthatyouwilluseduringa typicallisteningsession . Theoutputlevelsmayalsobeadjustedatanytime Affercheckingfor speakerplacementle , tthetest WerecommentdhatEzSet ! EQbeusedwhentheAVR usingtheremotecontrolandsemiOSDsystemT . o noisecffculateagain , andlistento seewhichchannels isfirstinstalletdo establisthheinitiallevelsethngs . adjusttheoutputlevelsin thisfashionp , resstheTest soundlouderthantheothersU , singthefrontleft speakerasa referencep , ressthe _ / _ - Navigation Button0 . As soonasthebuttonis pressedt , he Tomakeanychangesto thechanneol utputseffings , testtonewillbeginto circulateas indicatedearlierT . he Button _ ontheremoteto bringallspeakertso the gotothe CHANNEL ADJUST submenu correctchanneflromwhichthetestnoiseshouldbe samevolumelevelW . henthe , / _ , NavigationButton withintheMANU A L S Et UP Menu ( Figure16 ) . heardwillbeshowninthelowerthirdof thevideo ispushedt , hetestnoisecirculafiownillpauseon Todothis , firstpresstheOSDButton _ sothatthe thechannebl eingadjustedto giveyoutimeto make screenandintheLower DisplayLine _ " _ ljW . hilethe MASTER MENU ( Figuret ) appearsN . ext , press theadjuslmenWt henyoureleasethebuttont , hecir testnoiseis circulatingth , eproperchannepl osition theA / ' v NavigationButton _ untilthecursoris culafionwillresumeafterfiveseconds . willalsobeindicatedintheSpeaker / ChanneIlnput onthe MA NU AL S ET UP lineonthemenuin Indicators [ ] bya blinkinglelterwithinthecorrect useandpresstheSetButton qi _ i _ W . henthe Continueto adjusttheindividuaclhannelsuntilthe channel . MA NUA L SE TU P menuis shownp , ressthe volumelevelsoundsthesamefromeachspeakeL A / ' v " NavigationButton _ againuntilthecursor Toadjusttheoutputlevel , presstheA / V Navigation Adlustmentsshouldbemadewiththe _ / _ , Navigation isonthe CHANNEL ADJUST lineandpress Button _ untilthedesiredlevelisshowninthedis Button _ ontheremoteonly , NOTthemainvolume theSet Button _ to viewtheC HAN NE L playoronscreenO . ncethebuttonsarereleasedt , he controlsi , fyouareusinga sound - pressurleevel ( SPL ) AD d US T menu ( Figure20 ) . testnoisewillbeginto circulateagainin fiveseconds . meterforpreciseleveladjustmenst , etthevolumeso thatthemeterreads75dB , C Weighti % Slow . CHANNEL ADJUST Whenallchannelhsavethesameoutputlevelp , ress - _ _ " L _ 0 dB SBR : 0 dB EEN ! 0 dB SBL : 0 dB theTestButton _ againto completetheprocess . Whenallchannelshaveanequalvolumelevel , the _ ' R ! 0 dB SL : 0 dB adjustmenist completeT , . oexitthismenu , pressthe SR ! 0 dB SUB : 0 dB TEST TONE : AUTO _ ON NOTEO : utputleveladjustmenwt ithtnetesttoneis A / V NavigationButton _ untilthecursoris LEVEL RESET : _ ON notavaihbleintheSurroundOffmodes . LEVEL TRIM : nexttothe BACK TO MASTER MENU line , EZSET SETTINGS = _ ON andthenpresstheSet Button _ to returnto the BACK TO MASTER MENU MASTER MENU . Youmayhavetheoutpultevelsremainthesameforall inputsorto beadjusteddifferentlfyoreach ( orany ) Inadditionto havingthetesttonecimulateautomafi F _ gu2re0 inputW . hilemostlistenerpsreferto keepthesameout cally , youmayalsoturnthetesttoneon , butadvance putlevelsforallsourcesy , oumaywishto raiseor lower Toprovidethemaximumflexibilityc , hanneol utputlevel itfromonechannetlo thenextmanuallyT . hisallows somechannelsp , articulartlhyesubwoofeorutpuftora adjustmentms aybemadeeitherwithorwithoutthe youto makecalibratioandiuslmentsb , utto havemore specificsourcesuchasaCDthatisprimariluysedfor internatlesttone , andwhenthetoneis in useitmay controol verthewaythetesttoneis movedamong musicplayback . beprogrammetdo automaticallcyirculateamongthe thechannels . activechannelosr to onlymovefromonechannetlo Toenterindividuaslettingsfora specificinput , fimt Tochangethetonemanuallyf , irstmakece _ lainthat thenextonyourcommandW . hentheC HAN NE L makesurethatyouhaveeitherrunEzSet / EQand / or theCHANNEL ADJUST menuisonthe AD d US T menufirstappearswerecommendthat madeanydesiredmanuatlrimadjustmenttso seta screenf , ollowingtheinstructionsshownabove , and youalwaysrunthetesttoneoncetheautomaticmode baselineforallchannelsA . fterthatisdone , pressthe thenpresstheuntilthecursorisonthe T E ST toverifythatthespeakershavebeenproperlycon OSDButton _ to exitthemenusystemandthen T0 NE line , Next , pressthe _ / , Navigation nectedT , odothis , pressthe , / m , NavigationButton selecttheinputforwhichyouwishto enterdifferent Button _ untilMA N is inhighlightevdideoT . his againuntilthecursorisontheTEST TONE
Page: 31

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION levelsettingsby usingeithertheInput Source unitmaybechangedat anytime . Asyouaddnewor Selectors [ ] onthefrontpanelorthebuttons differenstourcesorspeakerso , r if youwishto change ontheremotethatareusedto selectaninput a settingto betterreflectyourlisteningtaste , simply sourceO _ _ , Next , returnto the followtheinstructiontsot changingthesettingsforthat CH ANN E L 0 UT PU T submenuusingthesteps parametears showninf : % section . outlinedabove . Havingcompletedthesetupandconfiguratiopnrocess Atthe CHANNEL OUTPUT menupress foryourAVR435 , youamaboutto experienctehe A / v NavigationButton _ un81thecursoris finestinmusicandhometheaterlisteningE . nioy ! pointingto the L E VE L TR I M lineandthen pressthe , _ , / V NavigationButton _ onceso that I N DE PE ND EN T appearsinhighlighted videoW . henthissettingis activeyoumaychangethe channeol utputlevelsforanyinputwithoutchanging thesettingspreviousleystablishefdoranother . Toreturnto thesettingsestablishebdyEzSeVEQ , evenif youhavemademanuaclhangestotheoutput trimsusingthestepsshownabove , pressA / V NavigationButton _ sothatthecursoris pointing tothe EZSET SETTINGS lineandthen pressthe , _ , / V NavigationButton _ onceso 0 N appearsin highlightevdideo . Remembetrhat afterturningthe EzSeVEsQettingsbackonyoumust turn _ etumto thismenulineandchangethesettingto 0 F F ifyouwishto makeanymanuatlrimadjust ments , WhenaMchangesto theChanneOl utputlevelsand theassociatedleveltrimsettingshavebeenmade pressthe A / V NavigationButton _ until thecursoris ontheBACK TO MANUAL SE T U P menuandthenpressingtheSet Button sothatyoumaymakeanyotheradjustmenttso thesystemparametersIf . thechangesjustmadecom - pletethemanuaal djustmentnseededp , resstheOSD Button _ to exitthemenusystemandresume normalsystemoperation . AdditionalInputAdjustments Afteroneinputhasbeenadjustedfor Surroundmode , digitailnput ( ffany ) , speakertype , andoutputlevels , gobacktothe INPUT SETUP lineonthe MA ST ER ME NU ( Figure1 ) andentertheset tingsforeachinputthatyouwilluse . Inmostcases , onlythedigitailnputandsurroundmodewillbediffer entfromoneinputto thenext , whilethespeakertype , crossovefrTequencNy , ightmodeandoutputlevel settingswillusuallybethesameandmaybequickly enteredbyenteringthesamedatausedforthe originailnput . Oncethesettingsoutlinedonthepreviouspageshave beenmadet , heAVR435 is readyfor operationW . hile therearesomeadditionaslettingsto bemadet , hese am bestdoneafteryouhavehadanoppoltunityto lis tento a varietyof sourcesanddifferentkindsof pro grammateriaTl . heseadvancedsettingsare described onpages39 and40 of thismanualI . nadditiona , ny of thesettingsmadein theinitialconfiguratioonf the
Page: 32

OPERATION Whenyouwillbeawayfromhomeforanextended • The6 C H DI R EC T inputshouldbeused Basic Operation periodof time , itis alwaysa goodideato completely whentheSBRandSBLinputsareNOTinuseand Onceyouhavecompletedtheinitiasletupandconfigu turntheunitoffwiththefrontpanelMainPower theinputsourcedevicehasitsowninternabl ass rationof theAVR435 , itis simpleto operateand Switch [ ] . managemenstystemT . hisinputpassestheinput enjoyT . hefolbdng instructionwsillhelpyoumaximize fromthesourcedirectlythroughto thevolumecon theenjoymenotf yournewreceiver : NOTEA : llpresetmemorieasrelostiftheunitis left trolwithoutanyanalogto digitacl onversionandit turnedoffby usingtile MainPowerSwitch [ ] for mutestheunusedinputjacksto prevenut nwanted TurningtheAVR435 Onor Off morethanfourweeks . • WhenusingtheAVR435totthefirsttime , youmust noisefromintetleringwithsystemperformance . presstheMain PowerSwitch [ ] toturntheuniton . Source Selection • The8 C H DI R EC T inputshouldbeused Thisplacestheunitina Standbymodea , sindicatedby whenaninputisconnectedto alleight8 - Channel • Toselecta sourcep , ressanyoftheInput Selector tileambeirlluminafiosnurroundinthgeStandby / On Direct Inputs @ andwhentheinputsource Switchi11 . Oncetheunitis inStandbyy , oumaybegin Buttons _ ) _ ontheremote . devicehasitsowninternabl assmanagemenstys a listeninsgessionbypressingtheStandby / OnSwitch • Theinputsoumemayalsobechangedby pressing tern . Thisinputpassestheinputfromthesource [ ] onthefrontpanelo , rthePowerOnButton _ or thefront - paneIlnput SourceSelectorButton [ ] . directlythroughto thevolumecontolwithoutany AVRSelectorql _ ) ontheremoteT . hiswillturn Eachpressof thebuttonwillmovetheinputselec analogto digitalconversioannditmutesthe tileunitonandrefurntheAVRto theinputsourcethat tionthroughthelistof availablienputs . unusedinputjacksto preventunwantednoise waslastusedT . heunitmayalsobeturnedonfrom frominterferingwithsystempe _ 1ormance . Standbbyypressinganyof tileInput Selector • Whena newinputisselectedtheAVRwillautomat Buttons _ _ ) ontheremoteorthe Volume and Tone Control icallyswitchto thedigitalinput ( ifselected ) s , urround InputSourceSelectorButton [ ] onthetrontpanel . mode , componenvtideoinput , A / VSyncDelayand • Adjustthevolumeto a comfortablleevelusingthe Whenevethr eAVRisturnedon , youwillseeallofthe NightModeconfigurationtshatwereineffectthe front - paneVl olumeControl [ ] orremoteVolume tiont - paneinl dicatorlsightupfora fewsecondsT . hisis lasttimethatinputwasused . Ifthe L E VE L Up / DownButtons _ @ . normala , nditispartof theunit'spoweponselftest TRIM IineonthCeHANNEL ADJUST procedure . menu ( Fig2 . 0 ) wassettoINDEPENDENT , • Totemporarilsyilenceallspeakeroutputsp , ressthe asshownon pages30 - 31 , thesettingsforchannel NOTEA : fterpressingoneoftile Input Selector Mute Button _ @ . Thiswillinterrupttheout outputbvelswinalsochangeto thepresetvalues . putto allspeakersandtheheadphonjeack , butit ButtonsO _ ) _ to turntheuniton , willnotaffectanyrecoldingordubbingthatmaybe presstheAVRSelectorql _ to settheremote • The % nt - paneVl ideo4 InputsI ' _ 1 , OpticalDigital controtlo theAVR435functions . in progressW . henthesystemis muted , theword 3 Input [ ] ortheCoaxialDigital3 Input [ ] may MU T E willflashintheonscreendisplayand Toturntheunitoffat theendof a listeningsession , beusedtoconnectadevicesuchasa videogame Upper DisplayLine [ ] , presstheMute Buttons simplypresstheStandby / OnSwitch [ ] onthefront orcamco _ detor yourhomeentertainmesnytstemon @ againto returnto normaloperation . panelorthePowerOff Button _ [ IPd _ ' _ onthe atemporarbyasis . remote . Powewr illbeshutoffto anyequipment • Theunit'stonecontrolsmaybetakenoutof the • Astheinputsourceis changedt , henewinputname pluggedintotherear - paneSlwitchedACAccessory signapl athbypressingtheToneModeButtonon willappearmomentarilaysanon - screendisplayin Outlet @ andtheilluminatioanroundtheStandby / thefrontpanel [ ] ortheremote _ . Thefirst thelowerthirdof thevideodisplayT . heinputname OnSwitch [ ] willturnamber . pressof eitherbuttonwillshowa messageinthe willalsoappearintheUpperDisplayLine [ ] and Whentheremoteis usedto turntheunit " off , " it is on screendisplayandLower DisplayLine [ ] inthefrontpanelInput Indicators _ i " l . actuallyplacingthesystemina Standbymode , asindi - withthecurrentstatusof thetonecontrolsT . hesys catedbytheamberlighfingaroundtheStandby / On tamdefaultis T 0 NE I N , whichindicatesthat • Whenanaudioonlysourceisselectedt , helastvideo thebassandtrebbcontrolsareactive . Pressthe Switch [ ] . inputusedremainsroutadtotheVideol / Video 2 , A , / V NavigationButton _ ontheremoteor VideoOutputs _ i _ ) andVideoMonitorOutputs • ToprogramtheAVR435 forautomatitcurn - off , the _ / p , Button [ ] onthefrontpanelto change i _ ) . Thispermitssimultaneouvsiewingandlistening presstheSleepButton _ ontheremoteE , . ach thesettingto T 0 N E 0 U T , whichis " flat " to differenstources . pressofthebuttonwilldecreastehetimebefore responsewithoutthetonecontrolsbeingactive . shutdowninthefollowingsequence : • Whena compositoerSddeosourceisselectedth , e Whenthetonecontrobareactivet , heamountof videosgnabl r thatinpuwt illberoutedto theVideo m _ n min mln mm min 1 bassandtmbb booWcutmaybeadjustedbyfirst MonitorOutputi _ ) andwillbevbwabbona TV 3 _ 3 = = e , 2p = = e , I0 = = e , OF F pressingtheToneModeButtononthefrontpanel rain mlr _ m _ n = _ monitocronnectetdo theAVR435 . [ ] ortheremote _ fi _ voorthreetimesuntilthe OnceyouhavesetthedesiredSleepT _ meth , efront 6 - Channel / 8 - ChanneDl irect Input desiredsetting ( BASS MODE or TREBLE paneldisplaywillautomaticaldlyimto halfbrightness Therearetwoinputchoicesavailablfeor usewith M0D E ) appearsintheon - screendisplayandthe andreturn , Tocheckonthetimeremaininguntilthe sourcessuchasa DVDAudioor SACDplayerthatare Lower DisplayLine _ ' lj . Next , usethe , A , / V unitshutsoff , presstheSleepButton @ once . connectedto the8 - ChannelDirect Inputs _ . NavigationButton @ ontheremoteor the _ / 1 _ Buttononthefrontpanel [ ] to changethesetting Selecttheappropriatienputaccordingto thewayyour TocanceltheSleepfunctionp , ressandholdthe systemandsourceequipmenits configured : asdesiredT . he unitwillreturnto normaloperation SleepButton _ ) untiltheinformatiodnisplayleturns within5 secondsafterthesettingis changed . to normalbrightnessa ; ndthewoldsSL EE P 0 F F willappearintheLower DisplayLine _ ' _ 1 .
Page: 33

OPERATION • Forprivatelistenings , implyplacea standard selecta newsurroundmodef _ omthefrontpanel , first " . 1 " channerleferredto whenyouseethesesystems 1 / 4 " stereoheadphonpelugoradaptorintothe presstheSurroundModeGroupSelectorButton describeads " 5.1 / ' " 6.1 " or " 7.1 . " Thebasschanneisl HeadphoneJack [ ] behindthedoor [ ] onthe [ ] untilthedesiredmajorsurroundmodegroupsuch separatefromtheotherchannelsb , utsinceitis inten - frontpanelT . hespeakerws illautomaticallmyute asDelby , DTSorLogic7 isselectedN . ext , pressthe tionallybandwidthdimitasdo , unddesignerhsavegivenit anda twochannesl tereosignawl illbesentto the SurroundModeSelectorButton [ ] to choosethe thatuniquedesignatioWn . hena Digitasl oundtraciks headphoneTsh . eLower DisplayLine [ ] willread specificindividuaslurroundmode . playingt , henumberof channelasvailablewillvary 1 ) 0 L BY H : BP , indicatingthattheheadphone accoldingto thewayin whichtheprogramwas Toselecta surroundmodeusingtheremotep , ress outputis intheBypassmode , andto confirmthat recoldedA . lthoughmostmoviesrecordedwithdigital thebuttonforthemajorsurroundmodegroupthat noprocessingis beingused . soundhave5 , 1soundtrackss , omehave6.1 or 7,1 includesthemodeyouwishto choosefrom : Dolby sound , whileothersretaintheorigina2l . 0 or even • Whentheheadphoneasrein use , youmaytake _ ) , DTSDigital _ ] _ , DTSNeo : 6 _ ] ] _ , Logic7 monauraslound . Whentheprogramsourceisa advantageoftheDelbyHeadphonemodesto bring I [ _ , Stereo ( ] _ orDSPSurround0 , Thefirst broadcastc , ableorsatellitedelivereddigitapl rogram , addedspaciousnestos headphonelisteningP . ress pressof thebuttonwillshowthecurrentmodef _ om onlyonetypeof soundl _ acmk aybedeliveredat a thatgroupif itis alreadyinuse , orthefirstavailable theDolby ModeSelectButton _ ) orthe time , whileopticasl ourcessuchas DVDmayprovide SurroundModeSelector [ ] to cyclethroughthe modeifyouarecurrentlyusinganothermode . To morethanoneaudiooption , Ineithercase , thedeci threeDolbyHeadphonme odesto selecttheone cyclethroughtheavailablemodesinthatgroup , sionof whattypeof soundtrackandhewmanychan thatyouprefen pressthebuttonagainuntilthedesiredmodeappears nelsto offeris upto theprogram'spreducekWiththe intheLower DisplayLine [ ] andtheon - screen AVR435 youareableto notonlyplaybacktheerigi Surround Mode Selection displayandinthefront - paneSlurroundMode nalcompatibledigitaflormat , butusingtheprocessing Indicators [ l _ J . Oneof themostimportanfteaturesof theAVR435 powerof theTexasInstrumentDsSPprocessoirt is is itsabilityto reproduceafullmultichanneslurround possibleto decodethebasicdigitatl _ ackfor 2.0or TheDolbyDigitalD , olbyDigitalEX , DTS5 . 1 , DTSES soundfieldfromdigitasl ourcesa , nalogmatrix 5,1 soundandthenselectanadditiona " lpost - pro MatrixandDTSESDiscretemodesmayonlybe surroundencodedprogramsandstandaldstereo cessing " modeto deliveradditionaclhannels . selectedwhena digitalinputis in use . Inaddition , programs . whena digitalsourceis presentt , heAVR435 will DolbyDigital automaticallsyelectandswitchto thecorrectmode , Seleclqoonf a surroundmodeisbasedonpersonal DolbyDigitailsa standaldpartof DVDa , ndisavailable regardlesosf themodethathasbeenpreviously taste , aswellasthetypeof programsourcematarial onspecialleyncodedLDdiscsandsatellitebroad selectedF . ormoreinformatioonnselecfindgigital beingused . Forexamplem , otionpicturesorTVpro castsanditis apartd thehighdeflnifiotnelevision sourcess , eetheDigitaAl udioPlaybacskectionbelow . gramsbeaungthelogoof oneofthemalorsurround - ( HD _ system . encodingprocessess , uchasDolbySurroundorDTS Whenthe6 ChanneVSChannedlirectinputsarein StereomaybeplayedineithertheDelbyDigital , An opSonael , xternaRl Fdemodulatoisr requiredto use , thereis nosurroundprocessinga , stheseinputs DelbyProLogicIICinemaD , TSNeo : 6Cinemao , r usetheAVR435 to listento theDolbyDigitasl ound - taketheanalogoutputsignalsfromanoptionale , xter Logic7 Cinemsaurroundmodesd , ependingonthe tracksavailableonlaserdiscs . ConnecttheREoutput nalDVDAudioor SACDplayero , ranothersource sourcemataual . of theLDplayerto thedemodulatoarndthenconnect deviceandcarrythemstraightthroughto thevolume thedigitaol utputof thedemodulatotro theOpticalor controwl ithoutanyfurtherdigitapl rocessing . NOTEO : ncea programhasbeenencodedwithmatrix CoaxialInputs I ' _ 1 " _ 1 _ @ of theAVR435 , No surroundinformatioint , retainsthesurroundinformation demodulatoisr requiredforusewithDVDplayersor Tolistento a programintraditionatwl o channel as longastheprogramis broadcasint stareoT , hus , DTSencodedlaserdiscs . stereou , singthefrontleftandfrontrightspeakers movieswithsurroundsoundmaybedecodedviaany only ( plusthesubweefei _ f , installedandconfigured ) , oftheanalogsurroundmodessuchasProLogicII Inorderto providemaximumplaybackcompatibility presstheStereo ModeSelectButton d _ ) until CinemaL , ogic7 CinemaorDTSNeo : 6Cinemaw , hen withDVDst , heAVR435 receivewr illalwaysdefault SU RR 0 U N ] ) 0 F F appearsintheLowerDisplay theyarebroadcasvtiaconventionTaVl stafionsc , able , firstto theplaybackmodeembeddedina disc'sdigital Line [ ] FromthefrontpanelpresstheSurround pay - TVandsatallitet _ ansmissioInna , ddihona , growing " flag " informationF . orDolbyDigitadl iscst , hefollowing ModeGroupSelector [ ] untiltheStereomodes numbeor f madefoptalevisiopnrogramss , portsbroad - playbackmodesareinilqallsyelectedaffertheAVR appearintheon - screendisplayandLowerDisplay castsr , adiodramasandmusicCDsarealsoproduced locksto theincomingdigitaal udiodatastreamto Line [ ] Next , presstheSurroundModeSelector insurroundsoundY , oumayviewa listofthesepro identifytheselected : Button [ ] untilS URR 0 UN D 0 F F appearsin gramsattheDolbyLabelaterieWsebsiteat theonscreendisplayandLower DisplayLine [ _ lj , w _ w . delbyc , om , • Whena 5.1 audiostreamis detectedt , heDolby Digita5l . 1 formatwillbeselectedr , egardlesosf the Digital Audio Playback Evenwhena programis notlistedascarryingintentional numbeor f speakersinyoursystemi , n compliance Digitaal udioisa majoradvancemeonvt erolderanalog surroundinformatioyno , umayfindthatthePmLogicII , withDolbyLaboratorielsicensingrequirements . surrounpdrocessinsgystemsit , deliversupto sixdis PmLogicIIx , Logic7 orDTSNeo : 6 , andtheHallor cretechannelsa , ndeachchannerleproducefsullfre • Whena discwiththeDolbyDigitalEXformatflagis Theatermodesoitendeliveernvelopinsgurroundpre - playedy , oursystemwillautomaticallsywitchto the quency { ange ( 20Hzto 20kHz ) andoffersdramatically sentationtshroughtheuseofthenaturailnformation EXmodewhensevenmainchanneslpeakersare improveddynamicrangeandsignificanimt provementtos presenitnallstereorecordings . available , signal - tonoiseratiosI . nadditiond , igitaslystemhsavethe capabilittyo delivearnadditionaclhannethl atisspecili - Surroundmodesmaybechangedatanytimeby callydevotedtolowfrequenciynformatioTn . hisisthe usingeitherthefrontpanelorremotec , ontrolT . o Continuedor ] page35
Page: 34

OPERATION Surround Mode Chart MODE FEATURES DolbyDigital AvailabloenlywithdigitailnputsourcesencodedwithDolbyDigitadl ata . It providesupto fiveseparatemainaudiochannelsand a speciadl edicatedlowfrequencyeffectschannel . DolbyDigitaEl X Availablwe henthereceiveris configuredfor6 . 1 / 7,1 channeol perationD , olbyDigitaEl Xis thelatestversionof DolbyDigitalW . henusedwith moviesor otherprogramsthathavespeciael ncodingD , olbyDigitaEl Xreproducesspeciallyencodedsoundtrackssothata full6 . 1 / 7.1 sound fieldisavaiBbleE . venifa sourcedoesnotcontainspecificEXencodingt , nespeciaal lgorithmsmaybeusedto derivea 6.1 / 7.1 output . DTS5 . 1 Whenthespeakerconfiguratioinssetfor 5.1 channeol perationth , eDTS5 . 1 modeis availablwe henDVDa , udioonlymusicorlaserdiscsencoded withDTSdataareplayed . DTS5 . 1 providesupto fiveseparatemainaudiochannelasnda speciadl edicatedlowfrequencychannel . DTSES6 . 1 Matrix Whenthespeakerconfiguratioinssetfor 6.1 / 7.1 operationp , laybackof a DTSencodedprogramsourcewillautomaticalltyriggertheselection DTSES6 . 1 Discrete of oneof thetwoDTSESmodesN . ewerdiscswithspeciaDl TSESdiscreteencodingwillbedecodedto providesixdiscretef , ullbandwidth channebplusa separatelowfrequencychanneAl . ll otherDTSdiscswillbedecodedusingtheDTSESMatrixmode , whichcleatesa 6.1 channel soundfieldfromtheorigina5l . 1 channesloun @ ack . DolbyProLogicII DolbyProLogicIIdecodesfull - ranged , iscretel , eft , centerright , rightsurroundandleftsurroundchannelfsromeithermatrixsurround - encoded Movie programsandconventionastlereosourceswhenananaloginputis inuse . TheDolbyProLogicII Moviemodeis optimizedtotmoviesoun @ acks , Music whiletheProLogicIIMusicmodeshouldbeusedwithmusicasl electionsT . heProLogicII Gamemodeis designedto enhancethesoundtrack Game of videogamesfromeitherdedicatedconsolesor computers . ThPeroLogicmodere c _ eateosriginaPl mLogicprocessingforthose ProLogic whopTefetrhatpresentation . DolbyProLogicIIx DolbyProLogicIixis thelatestextensionof DolbyLaboratory'bsenchmarskurroundtechnologtyhatcreatesa discrete7 . 1 soundfieldfrom Movie matrixsurroundortwochannesl tereosourceswhenyoursystemis configuredforsurroundbackspeakersM . ovie , MusicandGameversionsare Music availabltehatcustomizetheprocessintgo thetypeof sourceinuse . Thesemodesmayalsobeusedto addsurroundbackchanneltso 5.1 digital Game soundtracks . Logic7 Cinema Exclusivteo HarmanKa _ dofnorA / VreceiversL , ogic7 is anadvancedmodethatextractsthemaximumsurroundinformatiofnromeither Logic7 Music surroundencodedprogramsorconventionasltereomaterialW . henyoursystemhasbeenconfiguredfor usewithSurroundBackspeakers Logic7 Enhance ( seepage41 ) , youmaychoosebetweeneither7 . 1 or 5.1 versionsof theLogic7 modesw , hileonlythe5 . 1 versionsareavailablwe hen therearenoSurroundBackSpeakersT . heLogic7 C ( orCinemam ) odeshouldbeusedwithanysourcethatcontainsDolbySurroundor similar matrixencodingL . ogic7 C deliversfor increasecdenterchanneilntelligibilitayn , dmoreaccurateplacemenotf soundswithfadesandpans . The Logic7 M , or musicmode , enhancetshelisteningexperiencebypresentinga widerfrontsoundstageandgreaterrearambienceB . othLogic7 modesalsodirectlowfrequencyinformaSotno thesubwoofeOr finstalledandconfiguredto ) delivermaximumbassimpact . Logic7 adds addiSonablassenhancementht atcirculateslowf _ equencieinsthe40Hzto 120Hzm % eto thefrontandsurroundspeakersto delivera less localizedsoundstagtehatappearsbroaderandwiderthanwhenthesubwoofeirs thesobsourceof bassenergyL . ogic7 / 7 mayalsobeusedto add surroundbackchannelsto many5 . 1 digitalsoun @ acks . DTSNeo : 6Cinema Thesetwomodesareavailablwe henanyanalogsourceis playingto createa threechannelf , ivechanneol rsix channeslurroundpresentaSofrnom DTSNeo : 6Music conventionaMlahix - encodeadndl _ adiSonSatlereosourcesS . electtheCinemaversionof Neo : 6whena programwithanytypeof analogMatrix surroundencodingis presentS . electtheMusicversionof Neo : 6foroptimapl rocessinwghena nonencoded , twochannesltereoprogramis beingplayed . Theater TheTheatermodecreatesa soundfieldthatresembletsheacousacfeelingof a standardlivepetlormancetheater . Hall1 , Hall2 Thetwo Hallmodescreatesoundfieldsthatresembba small ( Hall1 ) or mediumsized ( Hall2 ) concerthall . DolbyVirtualSpeaker DolbyVirtuaSl peaketrechnologyusesa nextgeneTatioandvancedalgorithmto reproducethedynamicsandsurroundsoundeffectsof a precisely Reference placed5 . 1 channeslpeakersystemusingonlyfrontleftandrightspeakersI . nthe Referencme ode , theapparenwt idthof thesoundacrossthefront Wide imageisdefinedbythedistancebetweenthelwospeakersT . heWidemodeprovidesa widerm ; orespacious % nt imagewhenthetwospeakersare closetogetherD . ependinognthenumberof speakersavailableinyoursystema , varietyof differenstoundfieldoptionsareavailablteot boththe ReferencaendWidemodes . 5 ChanneSl tereo Thismodetakesadvantageof multiplespeakersto placea stareosignaal t boththefrontandbackofa room . DependinognwhethertheAVR 7 ChanneSl tereo hasbeenconfiguredforeither5 . 1 or6 . 1 / 7.1 operationo , neof thesemodes , butnotboth , is availableatanytime . Idealforplayingmusicin situationssuchasa pa _ / , it placesthesamesignaal t thefrontbft andsurround @ fta , ndtrentrightandsurroundrightspeakers . Thecenterchanneilsfeda summedmonomixof theinphasemateriaolf theleftandrightchannels . Surround Thismodeturnsoffallsurroundprocessinagndpresentsthepurebft andright - channeplresentatioonf two channesltereoprograms . Off ( Stereo ) DolbyHeadphone DolbyHeadphoneenablesordinarystereoheadphonetso portraythesoundof a fivespeakesrurround - playbacskystemT . heDH1modecreates DH1 headphonepresentallotnhatresemblesa small , welldampedroomandis appropriatfeor usewithbothmoviesandmusiconlyrecordings . DH2 TheDH2modecreatesa moreacousticalllyiveroomparticularlsyuitedto musiclisteningT . heDH3modecreatesa largerroom , morelikea DH3 concerthallormovietheater .
Page: 35

OPERATION • Whena discwithDolbyDigitadl ata , butonly Thefirstnumberinthedisplaymessageindicateshow CoaxialInputsI ' _ 11 _ @ @ , Ino _ detro providea 2.0 audioisdetectedt , hedetaultmodeis Dolby manydiscretefrontchanneslignalsarepresent backupsignaal nda sourceforanalogstereorecording , Digitawl ithProLogicII post - processinwghenyou theanalogoutputsprovideodndigitasl ourceequipment • A " 3 " tellsyouthatseparatefrontleft , centerand havea 5.1 speakersystemo , r DolbyDigitawl ith shouldalsobeconnectetdo theirappropdatianputson frontrightsignalsareavailableT . hiswillbedisplayed ProLogicIIxpost - processinwghenyouhave theAVR435 rearpanel ( e . g . c , onnecttheanalogstereo for DolbyDigita5l , 1 andDTS5 , 1 programs . a 7.1 speakersystem . audiooutpuftroma DVDto theDVDAudioInputs @ • A " 2 " tellsyouthatseparatefrontleftandrightsig - ontherearpanelwhenyouconnectthesource's • Dependinognthenumberof speakerchannels nalsamavailableb , utthereis nodiscretecenter digitaol utputs ) . availablien yoursystemo , ncetheAVRlocksto channeslignal , ThiswillbedisplayedforDolby thedigitalsignal , youmayselectanysurround If youhavenotalreadyconfiguredaninputfora digital Digitabl itstreamtshathavestereoprogrammaterial . modeor post - processinogptionthatisavailable , sourceusingtheon - screenmenusasshownon page • A " 1 " tellsyouthatthereis onlya monochannel basedontheincomingdatastream'spossible 21 , firstselecttheinputusingtheremoteor 1 ] ont availableintheDolbyDigitabl itstream , restricfionasndthenumberof speakersinyour panelcontrolsa , soutlinedinthismanualN . ext , systemF . orexamplew , hena 5,1 or2 . 0 audio selectthedigitasl ourcebypressingtheDigital Themiddlenumbeirnthedisplaymessagiendicates sl _ eamis in use , youmayselectalternatep , ost SelectButtonl ] _ r _ andthenusingthe A / V howmanydiscretesurrouncdhanneslignalsarepresent . processinsguchasLogic7 / 7 ChanneMl ovie NavigationButton _ ontheremoteor the , / 1 _ Modepost - processintgo createtherearsurrounds • A " 3 " tellsyouthatseparated , iscreteleftsurround , Button [ ] onthefrontpanelto chooseanyof the in7 . 1 speakersystems . centersurroundandrightsurroundsignalsarepres OPTICAL or COAXIAL inputsa , sthey ent . ThisisavailableonlyondiscswithDTSES appearintheUpperDisplayLine [ ] oron screen DTS digitalaudio . displayW . henthedigitasl ourceisplayingt , he DTSis anothedr igitalaudiosystemthatis capableof AVR435 willautomaticalldyetectwhichtypeof digital • A " 2 " tellsyouthatseparatesurroundlettandright delivering5 , 1 or 6,1 discreteor matrixsoundfield datastreamis beingdecodedanddisplaythatinfor signalsamavailableT . hiswillbedisplayedtor Dolby reproductionA . lthoughbothDTSandDolbyDigitaal re mafionintheUpperDisplayLine [ ] . Digita5l , 1andDTS5,1 programs . digital , theyusedifferentmethodsof encodingthesig nals , andtt _ ustheyrequiredifferendt ecodingcircuits • A " 1 " tellsyouthatthereis onlya singles , urround - Whenbotha digitaal ndananalogconnectionare to convertthedigitasl ignalsbackto analog . encodedsurroundchannelT . hiswillappearfor madebetweena sourcedeviceandtheAVR , thedigi DolbyDigitabl itstreamtshathavematrixencoding . talinputis thedefaultI . f thedigitalstreamis notpres DTSencodedsoundtrackasreavailableonselectDVD entoris interruptedth , eunitwillautomaticaMswyitch • A " 0 " indicatesthatthereis nosurroundchannel andLDdiscsa , swellasonspeciaal udioonlyDTS overto theanaloginputsfortheselectedsource , informationT . hiswillbedisplayedfortwochannel discsY . oumayuseanyLDorCDplayerequipped stereoprograms . If youwishto disabletheautopollingfeaturey , ou witha digitaol utputto playDTSencodeddiscswith maydosoby followingtheinstructionsshowninthe Thelastnumberindicateswhetherthereisa discrete theAVR435 , Allthatis requiredisto connectthe AdvanceFdeaturessectionof thismanuaol npage40 , lowf _ equenceyffects ( LFEc ) hannelT . hisisthe " . 1 " in player'soutputto eitheranOpticalor CoaxialInput thecommonabbreviatioonf " 5.1 " soundanditis a ontherearpanelq _ ) @ orfrontpanel1 " _ 41 " _ l Digital BitstreamandSurroundModeIndications speciacl hannetlhatcontainsonlybassfTequencies , Whena digitasl ourceis playingt , heAVR435 senses Inorderto listento DVDsencodedwithDTSsound - thetypeof bitstreamdatathatispresent . Usingthis • A " . 1 " tellsyouthatanLFEchanneils presentThis tracks , theDVDplayermustbecompatiblewiththe informationth , ecorrectsurroundmodewillautomati willbedisplayedfor DolbyDigita5l . 1 andDTS5 . 1 DTSsignal , whichis indicatedbya DTSlogoonthe callybeselectedF . orexampleD , TSbitstreamwsill programsa , savailable . player'sfrontpanel . EarlyDVDplayersmaynotbe causetheunitto switchto DTSdecodinga , ndDolby • A " 0 " indicatesthatthereis noLFEchanneilnfor ableto playDTS - encodeDdVDsT . hisdoesnotindi DigitalbitstreamwsillenableDolbyDigitadl ecoding . mafionavailableH . oweveTev , enwhenthereis no catea problemwiththeAVR435 , assomeplayers WhentheunitsensesPCMdatafromCDsorLDs , you dedicatedLFEchannell , owfrequencysoundwillbe cannotpasstheDTSsignatlhroughto thedigitaol ut mayselectanyof thestandardDolbyorDTSsurround presenatt thesubwooteorutputwhenthespeaker puts . Ifyouareindoubtasto thecapabilitoyf your modesorLogic7 . Sincetherangeof availablseur configuratioins setto showthepresenceof a DVDplayetro handleDTSdiscsc , onsulttheplayer's roundmodesis dependenotnthetypeofdigitaldata subwoofer . owner'smanual . thatis presentt , heAVR435 showsyouwhattypeof • Theinformatioinntherightsideof thedisplaywill signails presentto helpyouunderstandthechoiceof NOTE : SomeDVDplayershavea defaultsettingthat tellyouifthedigitaal udiodatacontainsa special modes . doesnotpassthroughtheDTSsignal . Beforeplaying flagsignatlhatwillautomaticalalyctivatetheappro DVDswitha DTSsoundtrackm , akecertainthatthe Whena digitasl ourceis firstdetectedt , heAVR435 priate6 . 1 or 7.1 modeT . hiswillbeshownas selllngsinyourDVDplayehr avebeenproperlyadjusted willdisplaya messageto indicatethetypeof bitstleam EXONor EXOFFfor DolbyDigitalbitslleamsand sothatDTSaudiois passedthroughC . onsultthe beingreceivedT . hismessagewillappearshortlyafter ESONor ESOFFfor DTSbitstreams . owner'smanuafloryourDVDplayerformoreinforma aninputor surroundmodeis changeda , ndwinremain Whena 2.0 or 5.1 digitasl ourceis playingona sys tiononmakingthesesettings . intheLower DisplayLine [ ] foraboutfiveseconds tamconfiguredfor5 . 1operafiony , oumayuseDolby beforethatportionof thedisplayreturnsto thenormal Selectinga DigitalSource DigitaEl X , DTSES , Logic7 / 7 or DolbyProLogicIIx surroundmodeindication . Toutilizeeitherdigitalmodey , oumusthaveproperly to addrearchannelfsorfull7 , 1 soundfields . Note , connecteda digitalsourceto theAVR435 , Connect ForDolbyDigitaal ndDTSsourcesa , numericainl dica howeverth ; attheavailabilitoyf specificmodesfor thedigitaloutputsfromDVDplayersH , DT _ / receivers , tion ( suchas 3 / 2 / 2.1 ) willappears , howingthenum postprocessinigs dependanotntheformatof the satellitesystemsor CDplayersto theOpticalor betof channelspresenitnthedata . incomingsourcematerialW . hilesomecombinafions
Page: 36

OPERATION ( e . g . , a DolbyDigitaol r DTS5 . 1 sourcewithLogic Thelettersinsidetheboxestellyouwhichchannels forthatchannelI . nothercasesyoumayseeletters 7 / 7 or DolbyProLogicllx post - processinagr ) eallow arereceivinganinputsignal , Sinceconventionaalria withnospeakerboxesT . hisindicatesthatthereisa able , others ( e . g . A DolbyDigita5l . 1 sourcewithDTS logaudiois only1wechannelst , he " U'and " R " letters discretesignaflorthatchannelb , utdueto themode Nee : 6 ) are not . If youwishto addsurroundback willlightwithanyanalogsourceW . hena digitalsource inuse ( e , g . DolbyVSwitha 5.1 sourcet ) hereis no channeltso a 2.0 or 5.1 sourcewerecommendthat is inuseyouwillseelettersdisplayedthatcorrespond signalbeingsentto thechannel . youexperimenwt iththevariousoptionsto seewhich to thenumberof channelisn theincomingdata NightMode maybeavailableandwhicharebestsuitedto your streamw , hichmaybejusttheLandR fortwochan A speciafleatureof DolbyDigitails theNightmode , tasteandlisteningenvironment . nelPCMor 2.0 DolbyDigitaml aterialW . hena 5.1 whichenablesspeciallyencodedDolbyDigitailnput signails beingreceivedtheL / C / R / SL / SRindicators Itis alwaysa goodideato checkthereadoutforthe sourcesto beplayedbackwithfulldigitailntelligibility willlight , withtheLFEindicationalsobeingshown channedl atato makecertainthatitmatchestheaudio whilereducingtheminimumpeaklevelby1 / 4 to 1 / 3 . whenanLFEsignalis presentAll sevenindicators , logoinformatiosnhownonthebackof a DVDpack Thispreventsabruptlyloudtransillonfsromdisturbing includingtheSBL / SBRlettemwilllightfor a 7.1 sig - age . Insomecases , youwillseeanindicationtot othersw , ithoutreducingtheimpacot f thedigital nal , anda horizontalilneis shownto connectthe " 2 / 0 / 0 " evenwhenthedisccontainsa full5 . 1 , or sourceT . heNightmodeisavailableonlywhenDolby SBL / SBRindicatorws hena 6.1 sourceis inuse . 3 / 2 / . 1 , signalW . henthishappensc , hecktheaudio Digitaslignalswithspeciadl ataare beingplayed . outputsettingsfor yourDVDplayerortheaudiomenu it is importantto notethatalthoughDolbyDigitalf , or TheNightmodemaybeengagedwhena Dolby selectionfsorthespecificdiscbeingplayedto make examplei , s _ efermdto asa " 5.1 " systemn , otallDolby DigitaDl VDis playingby pressingtheNight Mode ce _ lainthattheplayerissendingthecorrectsignal DigitaDl VDsor programsamencodedfor 5.1 . Thus , it Button _ ontheremoteN . ext , pressthe A / V totheA \ / R . is sometimesnormaflor a DVDwitha DolbyDigital NavigationButton _ to selecteitherthemiddle soundtractko triggeronlythe " L " and " R " indicatom . PCMPlayback rangeorfullcompressiovnersionsof theNight PCMisttneabbreviatiofnorPulseCodeModulation , NOTE : ManyDVDdiscsare recordedwithboth " 5.1 " modeT . oturntheNightmodeoff , pressthe A / V and " 2.0 " versionsof thesamesoundtrackW . hen thedigitalsignaflormatusedforstandardCDplay NavigationButton _ untilthemessageinthe back , andothernon - DolbyDigitaal ndnon - DTSdigital playinga DVD , alwaysbecertainto checkthetypeof lowerthirdof thevideodisplayandintheLower materiaol nthedisc . Mostdiscsshowthisinformation sourcessuchas MiniDiscW , hena P CII signails DisplayLine [ ] readsD - RANGE OFF . detectedt , heLower DisplayLine [ ] willbriefly intheformof a listingoricononthebackof thedisc TheNightmodemayalsobeselectedto alwaysbeon showa messagwe iththelettersPCM , inadditionto a jacket , Whena discdoesoffermulllplesoundllack at eitherlevelof compressionusingtheoptionsinthe readouot f thesamplingfrequencyof thedigitasl ignal . choicesy , oumayhaveto makesomeadjustmenttso ] ) OLBY SURROUND menuS . eepage23for yourDVDplayer ( usuallwy iththe " AudioSelect " bulton Inmostcases , thiswillbeP C11q 4.1 , k Hz or informallononusingthemenusto setthisoption . or ina menuscreenonthedisc ) to senda full5 . 1 PC 11q & k Hz , thoughinthecaseof specially feedto theAVR435 . It isalsopossiblefortheb / peof masteredh , ighresolutionaudiodiscs , youwillseea MP3Audio Playback signafleedto changeduringthecourseof a DVD's P ( [ 11 ' = 16k Hz indicationN . otethatthesampling TheAVR435 is oneof thefewreceiversequippedfor playbackI . nsomecasest , hepreviewsof special ratedisplayedis thatof theincomingdigitalsignal , and onboarddecodingtottheMP3audioformatusedby materiawl illonlyberecordedin 2.0 audiow , hilethe nottheupsampledratethatmaybeappliedto PCM computersandportableaudiodevicesB . yoffering mainfeatureis availablein5 . 1 audio . TheAVR435 sourceswhenDolbyProLogicor PmLogicIIpro MP3decodingt , heAVR435 isableto deliverprecise willautomaticallsyensechangesto thebitstreamand cessingis applied , asshownonpage21 . conversionof thedigitalsignalsto ananalogoutput , channeclountandreflectthemintheseindicators . alongwiththebenefitsof listeningto theMP3audio DuringPOMplaybacky , oumayselectanysurround Thelettersusedby theSpeaker / ChanneIlnput throughtheAVR435 ' s highcurrenat mplifierandthe modeexceptoneof theDolbyDigitaol rDTS / DTSES speakersfromyoursurroundsystemr , atherthanthe Indicators [ ] willflashto indicatewhena bitstream modes . hasbeeninterruptedT . hiswillhappenwhena digital smallerspeakersandlowpoweredamplifiertsypically Speaker / ChanneIlndicators inputsourceis selectedbeforetheplaybackstarts , or usedwithcomputers . Inadditionto thebitstreamindicatorsth , eAVR435 whena digitasl ourcesuchasa DVDis pausedT , he featuresa set of uniquechanneilnputindicatorsthat flashingindicatorrsemindyouthattheplaybackhas Totakeadvantageof theAVR435 ' 8MP3capabilities , tellyoubowmanychannelsof digitalintormafloanre stoppeddueto theabsenceof a digitasl ignaal ndnot simplyconnecttheS / PDIFoutputof a computer's beingreceivedand / orwhetherthedigitasl ignalis throughanyfaultof tt _ eA \ / R435 . Thisis normal , and soundcardor theS / PDIFoutputof a portabledigital interrupted ( Figure21 ) . thedigitapl laybackwillresumeoncetheplaybackis audiodeviceto eithertherearpanelDigital Inputs startedagain . @ orthefront - paneDl igital Inputsr _ " _ [ _ l I - " " " " - 1 Whenthedigitasl ignalisavailableth , eLower El3EEE ] ] F1 Theboxesaroundthechanneilndicationleltersare DisplayLine [ ] willindicatethatanMP3bitstream usedto showwhichspeakersareconfiguredinyour ispresenta , ndtheaudiowillbeginplaying . systemA . smallboxaroundtheletterindicatesthata " Small " speakerhasbeenassignedto thatposition , N ? < i > NOTES : whilea largerd , oubleboxindicatesa " Large " speaker • TheAVR435 is onlycapableof playingsignalsin assignment . theMP3 ( MPEGl / Layer3 ) format . It isnotcom - E 1 - - [ ] Notethatinsomecases , suchasananalogstereoor pallblewithothercomputeraudiocodecs , F _ gur2e1 2.0 digitalsourceyouwillseeemptyspeakerposition boxesw , hichindicatesthatthespeakerisaclve and • Thedigitalaudioinputsignaml aybeeitheroptical willreceivesround , butthatthereis nodiscretesignal or coaxialb , utthesignalmustbeintheS / PDIF
Page: 37

OPERATION format . Directconnectionof USBorserialdata • Whena digitalsoumeis playingy , oumaynotbe Button [ ] @ , _ . Next . presstheDirectButton outputsis notpossiblee , venthoughthesignals ableto selectsomeof theanalogsurroundmodes ( _ P . Within5 secondsofwhen1 ) I I _ E CT I N areintheMP3format . Ifyouhaveanyqueslqons suchas DolbyProLogicII . DolbyProLogicIIx . scrollsintheUpperDisplayLine [ _ J . enterthe aboutthedataoutputformatfromyourcomputer StereoH . all . Theateror Logic7 . stationfrequencybypressingtheNumeric Keys ora soundcard . checkwiththedevice'sowner's _ . ifyoupressanincorrecbt uttonwhileentering manuaol rcontactthemanufacturert'eschnical • Whena DolbyDigitaol r DTSsourceisplaying . a directfrequencyp , resstheClearButton @ to supporat rea . it isnotpossibleto makeananalogrecordingusing startover . theTapeOutputs _ andVideo1 orVideo2 NOTEW : henthe FMreceptionof a stationis weak . • Ifyourcomputeror soundcard'sdigitaol utputis not AudioOutputs @ @ . Howevetrh . edigitasl ignals audioqualitywillbeincreasedbyswitchingto Mono capableof directconnectionto theAVR435 . you willbepassedthroughto the DigitalAudio modebypressingtheTuningModeButton [ ] qi _ mayuseanoptionale , xternatlranscodetro convert Outputs _ 1 " _ 1 . so that11A NU AL / 110 N0 appearsmomentarily theUSBoutputof a computetro a formatcompati blewiththeAVR . Tuner Operation intheUpperDisplayLine [ ] andthengoesout . Thiswillalsoactivatemanuatluningmode . TheAVR435 ' stuneriscapableoftuningAM . FMand • Dueto thewidevariationinMP3formatsand FMStereobroadcassttaaonsS . tal _ onms aybetuned PresetTuning encodingspeedsi , t is possiblethattheAVR435 manuallyo , rtheymaybestoredasfavoritestationpre Usingtheremoteu , pto 30stationsmaybestoredinthe maynotbecompatiblewithallMP3inputsignals . setsandrecalledfroma 30 positionmemory . , _ , / R435 ' 8memoryforeasyrecalul singthefrontpanel Somemayproduceunacceptabrleesultsandsome conllolsortheremote . StationSelection maynotbedecodedT . hisis nota faultof eitherthe computeorr theAVR435 . butrathera by product 1 . PresstheAM / FMTunerSelectorButton Toenterastationintothememo % fimttunethestation oftheunpredictablneatureof MP3playback . ontheremoteto selectthetunerasaninputT . he usingthestepsoutlinedaboveT . hen : tunermaybeselectedfromthefrontpanelby IMPORTANNTOTESONDIGITALPLAYBACK : eitherpressingtheInput SourceSelector [ ] 1 . PresstheMemoryButton @ ontheremotet ; he • WhenplayingDVDsp , leasenotethatevenwhenyou untilthetuneris activeor bypressingtheTuner station'fsrequencwyillflash . haveselecteda specificdigitaal udioformatforplay BandSelectorl _ 4J . back . anindividuadliscmaychangeformatsorthe 2 . Withinfivesecondsp , resstheNumericKeys0 2 . PresstheAM / FMTunerSelectButton _ or numbeor f availablechanneldsuringplaybackF . or cowespondintogthelocationwhereyouwishto store TunerBandSelector [ ] againto switchbelween examplee , venifyouselecat DTSmodeforthemovie . thisstaaon'hsequencyO . nceenteredt , hepreset AMandFMsothatthedesiredfrequencybandis youmayseeDolbyDigitailnusewhenthetrailers . numbewr illappeairntheUpperDisplayLine [ ] . selected . menusor copyrighwt arningasreplayingT . hisis nota 3 . Repeattheprocessaftertuninganyaddillona ] faultwitheithertheAVRoryourDVDplayera ; sboth 3 . PresstheTuningModeSelector [ ] _ to select stationtso bepreset . arerespondintgo thewaythediscwascreated . manuaolrautomatitcuning . RecallingPresetStations • Whenviewingdigitatlelevisionsignalsn , otethatthe Whenthebuttonis pressedsothatA UT 0 / • Tomanuallsyelecat stationpreviouselynteredinthe numbeor f audiochannelasvailablme ayvaryduring ST EI _ E 0 appearsintheUpperDisplayLine presemt emoryp , resstheNumericKeys _ that thecourseof a programd , ependingonthecontent . [ ] . eachpressof theTuningSelectorsl _ ll _ t . correspontdo thedesiredstation'ms emory Forexamplew , hilea sportsevenmayhave5 . 1 willputthetunerina scanmodethatseeksthe location . sound , thecommercialosrlocalstaaoncontentmay nexthigherorlowerfrequencsytationwithaccept - bein2 . 0 . inadditionn , otalllocalstationasrecurrently ablesignalstrengthA . n AU T 0 ST T UN E1 ) • Tomanualtlyunethroughthelistof storedpresest ta - equippetdotcarryingthe5 . 1digitaal udiosignalsT . his indicationwillmomentarilayppearwhenthe Ionsonebyone , pressthePresetStationsSelector maymeanthateventhoughtheactualprogramis stationstopsat a stereoFMstationa , ndan Buttons [ ] _ onthefrontpaneol rremote . producedwith5 . 1 . itmaybetransmitteidna 2.0 AU T0 T U NE 1 ) indicationwillmomentarily configuratioinnsomeareasY . ourAVRwillautomaScall appearwhenanAMor monauraFl Mstationis Recording changeto reacttothepropetrypeofaudiostreamifit tuned . PresstheTuningbuttonsagainto scanto Innormaloperationth , eaudioorvideosoume is changedbythebroadcassttation . thenextreceivablsetation . selectedfor listeningthroughtheAVR435 issentto therecordoutputsT . hismeansthatanyprogramyou • AlthougthheAVR435willdecodevirtuallayllcurrent Whenthebuttonis pressedsothatI1AN UA L / arewatchingorlisteningto mayberecordedsimply DVDmoviesC , DsandHDTVsourcesit , ispossible 110 N0 appearsintheUpperDisplayLine [ ] . byplacingmachinesconnectedto theoutputsfor thatsomefuturedigitasl ourcesmaynotbecompall eachtapof theSelectowr illincreaseor decrease blewiththe _ , / R435 . TapeOutputs _ , orVideol / Video 2 Audioand thefrequencybyoneincremenWt . henthetuner VideoOutputs _ ) _ ) _ intherecordmode . receivesa strongenoughsignafloradequate • Notalldigitallyencodedprogramscontainfull5 . 1 reception1 . 1AN UA L T UN E1 ) willappearin Whena digitaal udiorecordeirs connectedto the or6 . 1 channeal udio . Consulttheprogramguide the Lower DisplayLineE _ lJ . DigitalAudio Outputs _ . " @ j . youareableto recold thataccompanietsheDVDorlaserdiscto deter 4 . Stationsmayalsobetuneddirectlyineitherthe thedigitasl ignalusinga CD R . MiniDiscor otherdigi minewhichtypeof audiohasbeenrecordedonthe automaticormanuaml ode . Toentera station'sfre tal recordingsystem . disc . TheAVR435 willautomaticallsyensethetype quencydirectlyf , irstselecttheAMorFMbandas of digitasl urroundencodingusedandadjustto desiredbepressingtheAM / FMTunerSelect accommodateit .
Page: 38

OPERATION NOTES : Dim Function • Thedigitaol utputsareactiveonlywhena digitasl ig SincetheAVR435 willoltenbeusedwhenmovies nalispre . senat , ndtheydonotconverat nanalog orothervideoprogramminigs viewedunderlowlight inputto a digitasl ignal , orchangetheformatof the conditionsy , oumaywishto lowerthebrightnesosf digitasl ignal . Inadditiont , hedigitalrecordemr ust thefre . nt - pandeilsplaysandindicatorssothattheydo becompatiblewiththeoutputsignal . Forexample , notdistracft _ omthevideopresentationY . oumaydim thePCMdigitailnputfroma CDplayermaybe thedisplaysusingthemenusystema , sshownon recordedona CD Ror MiniDiscb , utDoby Digital page39 , or youmaycontrotlhebrightnesdsirectly orDTSsignalsmaynot . fre . mtheremote , • Pleasemakecertainthatyouareawareof any SimplypresstheDire , Button _ onceto dimthe copyrighrtestqctionosnanymateriayloucopy . frontpanelto halfthenormabl rightnesslevel ; press Unauthorizedduplicationof copynghtedmaterialiss itagainto turnthedisplaysoft Notethatwhenthe prohibitedbyfederallaw . displaysaredimmedorturnedoff , thebluelighting aroundtheStandby / OnSwitch [ ] willcontinueto Output Level Trim Adjustment staylit asa re . mindetrhattheAVRis sWtIurnedon . NormaloutputleveladjustmenftortheAVR435 is TheaccentlightingfortheVolumeControl [ ] will establisheudsingEzSet / EQa , soutlinedonpages remainat itsnormallevel , ratherthandim whenthe 23 - 26 . Insomecases , howeverit , maybedesirable paneldisplaysareat halfbrightness . toadjusttheoutputlevelsusingprogrammateriasluch Notethatallchangesto thef _ ontpanelbrightness asatestdisc , ora selectionyouarefamiliarwith . levelaretemporaryt : hedisplayswillreturnto full Additionallyth , eoutputlevelforthesubwoofecran brightnessaftertheAVRis turnedoffandthenon onlybeadjustedusingthisprocedure . again . Toreturnthedisplaysto fullbrightneswsithout turningthe unitoff , presstheDire , Button _ as ToadjusttheoutputlevelsusingprogTammaterialf , irst neededuntilthedisplaysareon . setthereferencveolumeforthefrontleftandfrontright channelussingtheVolumeControl [ [ il _ q [ ] p Inadditionto loweringthebrightnesosf thedisplays orturningthemoffcompletelyy , oumaywishto have Oncethe _ eferencleevelhasbeenset , pressthe themappearwhenevear buttonontheremoteor ChannelSelectButton _ andF R0 NT L fre . npt anelis pusheda , ndthengraduallfyadeoutafter L E VEL willappearintheLower DisplayLine a settimeperiodY . oumaydothisby makingthe [ _ lj . Tochangethelevel , firstpresstheSet Button appropriatseettingsinthe VF D F AD E T T II E qli _ , andthenusetheA / T NavigationButton OUT IineoftAhDeVANCED SELECT to raiseorlowerthelevekDONOTusethevol - Menu , asshownonpage39 . umecontrola , sthiswillalterthereferencesetting . MemoryBackup Oncethechangehasbeenmade , presstheSet Thisproductisequippedwitha memorybackupsys Button _ andthenpre . ssthe _ , / ' v Navigation temthatpreservetshesystemconfiguratioinnforma - Button _ to selectthenextoutputchannellocation tionandtunerpresetsiftheunitisaccidentally thatyouwishto adjustT . oadjustthesubwoofelrevel , unpluggedorsubjectedto a poweroutageT . hismem - presstheA / ' v NavigationButton _ until orywilllastforat leastfourweeksa , fterwhichtimeall WOOFER LEVEL appearsintheLower informatiomn ustbereentered . DisplayLine [ ] oron - screendisplay . Repeattheprocedureas neededuntilallchannels requiringadjustmenhtavebeenset . Whenalladjust mentshavebeenmadeandnofurtheradjustments aremadefor5 secondst , heAVR435 willreturnto normaol peration . Theoutputlevelsmayalsobeadjustedusingtheon - screenmenusystemto eithertheinternatlesttone oranexternatlestdiscbyfolbJvingtheins11uctions shownonpage29 .
Page: 39

ADVANCED FEATURES TheAVR435 is equippedwitha numberof advanced anothermenu . Ifyouhavecompletedalladjustments . Next . makecertainthatthecursoris nextto the featuresthataddextraflexibiIB / tothe unit'soperation . presstheOSDButton _ to exitthemenusystem . V 0 L UME D EF AU L T linebypressingthe Whileit is notnecessartyo usetheseteaturesto A / • NavigationButton @ asneeded . Pressthe DisplayBrightness operatetheunit . theyprovideadditionaolptionsthat • NavigationButton @ sothatthewoTd0 N is TheAVR435 ' s frontpaneldisplaysandindicatorasre youmaywishto use . highlightedT . osettheactualturn - onlevel , pressthe setat a defaultbrightnesslevelthatis sufficienttot • NavigationButton @ oncesothatthecursor viewingina normallylit room . Howevery . oumaywish ADVANCED SELECT isnexttothe DEFAULT VOL SET line . Press to occasionalllyowerthebrightnessofthedisplayo , r the , / • NavigationButton @ untilthedesired VFD FADE TIME OUT ! _ turnitoffcempbtely . VFD : _ NALF OFF volumelevelis shownonthe DEF AU L T V 0 L VOLUME DEFAULT : | ON SEMI OSD TIME OUT : 5S S ET line . ThissettingmayNOTbemadewiththe Tochangethedisplaybrightnessseffingfora specific FULL OSD TIME OUT : 20S regulavrolumecontrols . AUTO POLL : OFF listeningsessiony , ouwillneedto makeanadjustment intne ADVANCED SELECT menuT . ostart . BACK TO MASTER MENU NOTES : incethesettingfortheturn - onvolumecan - presstheOSDButton _ to bringtheMAS T E R X _ notbeheardwhilethesettingis beingmade . you ME NU to thescreenP . ressthe • Navigation maywishto determinethesettingbeforemakingthe @ urn22 Button _ iI _ . untilthecursoris nextto the adjustmenTt . odothis . listento anysourceandadjust AD VAN CED Ihe . Presshe Set Button _ to Front - Panel - DisplayFade thevolumeto thedesiredlevelusingthere % lar entertheADVANCED SELECT menu Innormaloperationt , hefrontpaneldisplaysandindi VolumeControlsi ' [ illi ] _ q [ ID . Whenthedesired ( Figure22 ) catorsremaieonat fullbrightnessa , lthoughyoumay volumelevelto beusedat turn - onis reachedm , akea alsodimthemorturnthemoffasshownonpage35 . Next . press , / • NavigationButton _ theuntilthe noteof thesettingasitappearsinthelowerthirdof As anaddiSonaoIption , youmayabesettheAVRso cursorisnexttotheVF D line . Presstee • Navigation thevideoscreenor intheLower DisplayLine E _ lJ . thatthedisplaysareonwhenevear buttonis pressed Button _ untilthedesiredbrightneslsevelis high ( Ab / picavl olumebvelwillappearasa negative onthefrontpanelor remoteb , utthenfadeoutaftera lightedinthevideodisplayW . henF UL L is highlighted . numbesruchas - 25dB . ) Whenmakingtheadjust setperiodof time . thedisplayisat itsnormabl righl _ TeWssh . enHAL F is ment . usethe _ / • NavigationButton @ to enter highlightedth , edisplayis at halfthenormalbrightness thissetting . Tosetthefront - panedl isplaysto theFademode . level . When0 F F is highlighteda , llof thefront - panel presstheOSDButton _ to bringtheMaster indicatorws illgodark . Howeverth ; ebluelightingsur Unlikesomeof theotheradjustmentisnthismenut . he Menuto thescreen . Pressthe A / V Navigation turn - onvolumedefaultwillremainin effectuntilitis roundingtheStandby / OnSwitch [ ] willremainlit Button _ sothatthe . - > cursoris pointedto the to remindyouthattheAVRis stillturnedon . changedor turnedoffinthismenu . evenwhenthe AD VA NC ED line . andpresstheSetButton unitis turnedoff . to entertheADVANCED SELECT menu Oncethedesiredbrightneslsevelis selectedi , twill ( Figure22 ) . remainineffectuntilit ischangedagainoruntilthe Ifyouwishto makeotheradjustmentps , ressthe unitis turnedoff . WiththeADVANCED SELECT menuon A / • NavigationButton _ untiltheonscreen • - > cursoris nextto thedesiredsettingor the yourvideodisplayp , ressthe A / • Navigation If youwishto makeotheradjustmentsp , ressthe BACK TO MASTER MENU line . andpress Button _ sothatthe . - > cursoris pointedto the A / • NavigationButton @ untilthe - - > cursoris theSetButton qi _ i _ . Ifyouhavenootheradjust VFD FADE TIME OUT line . Next . pressthe nextto thedesiredsettingorthe BA CK T 0 meetsto make . presstheOSDButton _ to exit _ / _ ' NavigationButton _ so thattheamount MA ST ER ME NU lineandpresstheSet Button themenusystem . of timethatyouwishthedisplaysto fadeoutafter qi _ iJ . Ifyouhavenootheradjustmenttso make . press a buttonis pressedis shownW . hen0 F F is sebcted theOSDButton _ to exitthe menusystem . Semi - OSDSettings thereis nodisplayfadeout . Turn - OnVolumeLevel ThesemiOSDsystemplacesone linemessageast Oncethistimeis setandtheunitreturnedto normal Asis thecasewithmostaudio / videoreceiversw , hen thelowerthirdof thevideodisplayscreenwhenever operationth , edisplayswillremainonforthetimeperi theAVR435 isturnedon . itwillalwaysreturnto the theVolumeI . nputSourceS . urroundmodet . uner edselectedwhenevear buttonispressedonthefront volumesettingineffectwhentheunitwasturnedoff . frequencyoranyof theconfiguraSesnettingsis panelor remoteA . fterthattimetheywillgraduallyfade Howevery . oumaypreferto alwayshavetheAVR435 changedT . hesemiOSDsystemis helpfulinthatit out . withtheexcepSooef thelightingsurroundingthe turnonata specificset _ % , regaldbsaof whatwas enablesyouto havefeedbackonanycontrolchanges Standby / OnSwitch Ell . whichremainsonto remind lastin usewhenthe unitwasturnedoff . Tochangethe or remotecommandsusingthevideodisplaywhenit youthattheAVRis turnedon . Notethatifthedisplays detaultcendiSonso thatthesamevolumelevelis isdifficultto viewthefrontpaneldisplaysH . owever . havebeenturnedcompletelyoffusingtheDim alwaysusedat turn - on , youwillneedto makean youmayalsopleferto turnthesedisplaysoffperma - Buttona . sshownonpage38 . theFadefunctionwill adjustmenint theADVANCED SELECT nentlyY . oumayalsowantto adiustthelengthof time notoperate . menuTostart , presstheOSDButton _ to bdng thedisplaysremainonthescreenB . othof those theMASTER MENU ( Figure1 ) to thescreen . optionsarepossiblewiththeAVR435 . If youwishto makeadjustmenttso otheritemson Pressthe • NavigationButton _ i ] _ . untilthecursor the ADVANCED SELECT menu . presstbe is nextto theA DVA NCE D line . PresstheSet Toadjusttheonscreenappearancoef thesemiOSD A / • NavigationButton _ so thatthe . - > cursor Button _ to entertheADVANCED SELECT systemp , resstheOSDButton _ to bringthe is nextto thedesireditem . orplacethe . - > cursornext menu ( Figure22 ) MASTER MENU to thescreenP . ressthe • tothe BACK TO MASTER MENU lineand NavigationButtonli ] _ . untiltheonscreen . - > presstheSetButton _ to makeanadjustmentto cursoris nextto theA DV ANC ED line .
Page: 40

ADVANCED FEATURES theTimeOutentrywillremainineffectuntilit is PresstheSetButtonli _ ii . toenterhe MASTER MENU ( Figure1 ) . pressthe , / , ADVANCED SELECTmenu . changede , veniftheunitisturnedoft NavigationButton _ sothatthecursoris pointing to the I N / 0 UT S ET UP line . PresstheSet Whenthe ADVANCED SELECT menu If youwishto makeotheradjustmentsp , ressthe Button _ andthenfollowtheinstructionsshownon A / V NavigationButton _ untilthecursoris appearsp , ressthe A / V NavigationButton pagexxto changetheinputsourceR . eturnto the nextto thedesiredsettingorthe BA CK T 0 sothatthecursoris pointingto the SE MI A DV AN CE D MENU to reconflgurteheauto 0 S D / T I ME 0 U T line . Selecot neof these MA ST ER ME NU lineandpresstheSet Button pollsettingforthenewlyselectedinput . li _ i _ . Ifyouhavenootheradjustmenttso make . press options : Whenallchangesto theAutoPollsettingshavebeen theOSDButton _ to exitthemenusystem . madep . ressthe _ / _ NavigationButton • Tokeepthesemi - OSDsystemactivatedb , utto to selectanotherconfiguratioonpSononthe OigitalAuto - PollSettings adjustthelengthof timethedisplaysremainonthe ADVANCED SETUP Menu . movethecursor screenp , ressthe , / , NavigationButton InoTdetro providethegreatesftlexibilifyinaccom to BACK TO MASTER MENU lineandpress untilthedesiredtimeoutisshownT . hedefault modatingthewidestrangeof sourcest , heAVR435 theSetButton _ to makea changeto anof : ser settingis 5 seconds . includesbothanaloganddigitalaudioinputsforall menuoption , orsimplypresstheOSDButton sourcesI . n mostcasesyouwillwantto useoneorthe to exitthemenusystem . • ToturnthesemiOSDsystemoffsothatitdoesnot other , butnotboth . Howeverin . somecircumstanceits appearat anytime . pressthe , / 1 _ Navigation is desirableto makebothananaloganddigitalcon - Button _ so that0 F F is shownontheright nectionbebJveeansourcedeviceandtheA \ / R . sideof theline . An importanatpplicatiofnor dualaudioconnectioniss withcableor satelliteboxesw , heretheaudiooutput Ifyouwishto makeotheradjustmentsp , ressthe maychangedependingonthechannebl eingviewed • , / • NavigationButton _ untilthecursoris next andthefypeof audiothecablesystemor satellite tothedesiredsettingorthe BA CK T 0 MAS - receiverassociatewsithit . Toeliminatethe needto T E R MEN U lineandpresstheSet Buttonli _ iJ . If constantlsywitchbackandforto selectanaudiotype youhavenootheradjustmenttso make . pressthe eachtimeyouchangechannelst , heA \ / R435 ispro OSDButton _ to exitthemenusystem . grammedby defaultto automaticall " ypoll " theaudio inputsW . henadigitalaudiostreamit is sebctedfirst . FulI - OSDTime - OutAdjustment butifthedigitaal udiois removedtheAVRwillswitch TheF UL L 0 SD menusystemis usedto simplify to theanaloginputsassociatedwiththatinputasa thesetupandadjustmenotf theAVR435 by usinga back - up , inmostsystemsthisisthecorrectoperallon seriesof on - screenmenusT . hefactorydefaultsetting andnofurtherchangeis required . forthesemenusleavesthemonthescreenfor 20 Howeveri . fthisconfiguratiodnoesnotsuityoursys secondsaftera periodof inactivitybeforetheydisap ternapplicationtheAVR435 givesyoutheflexibilify pearfromthescreen ( TimeOut ) . TimeOutisa safeb / to turnthedigitalaudioautopollingonoroffonan measureto prevenitmageretentionof themenutext inputby inputbasisW . hentheAutoPollingis setto inyourmonitoror projectorw , hichmighthappenifit 0 F F . thesystemwillkeepthedigitaal udioinput wereleftonindefinitelyH . owevers . omeviewersmay activeandnotattemptto switchto theanalogsource prefera slightlylongeror shorterperiodbeforethe evenwhenthedigitaldatastreamstops . onscreendisplaydisappears . Ifyouwishto changetheautopollsettingf , irstselect _ , ) changethefullOSDTmeOut . youwillneed theinputyouwishto configurebypressingthe @ pro to makeanadjustmenint theA DV AN CE D priateInput SelectorOli'l ontheremoteo , ron SE L EC T menu ( Figure17 ) . 7ostarttheadlust - theSOURCElinepftheIN / OUT SETUP ment . presstheOSDButton _ to bringthe menu ( Figure2 ) . Next . withtheA DV AN CE D MA STE R MENU to thescreenP . ressthe • SE L E CT ME NU ( Figure22 ) onthesemen . NavigationButton li ] _ . unStlheonscreen . - > pressthe _ / 1 _ NavigationButton _ sothatthe cursoris nextto the AD VAN CE D line . Pressthe cursoris pointingto the AU T 0 P 0 L L line . Press SetButton _ to enterthe ADV AN CED the _ / _ NavigationButton _ to changea default SE L EC T menu ( Figure22 ) . settingsothat0 F F isshowninhighlightevdideoor to 0 N so thattheoriginasl ettingis restoredandthe Atthe ADVANCED SELECT menu ( Fig . 22 ) autopollingis onceagainactivated . makecertainthatthecursoris nextto theF UL L Sincethissettingis uniqueto eachinput , you 0 S D T I ME 0 U T lineby pressingthe A / V mustreturnto the I N PU T SE T U P menuto NavigationButton _ asneeded . Nextpressthe changeanyotherinputsT . odothat . pressthe _ / 1 _ _ / _ NavigationButton _ untilthedesiredtimeis NavigationButton _ so thatthecursoris displayedinsecondsU . nlikemostof theotheroptions pointingto theBACK TO MASTER MENU inthismenut . hisis a permanenstettingchangea , nd lineandpresstheSetButtonli _ iJ . At the
Page: 41

MULTI ROOM OPERATION TheAVB435 isfullyequippedto operateasthecon - ForinstallationwshereA - BUSmodulesareused , fol At theMUL T I V 0 L line , pressthe _ / • trolcenterfora completemultiroomsystemthatis lowtheinstructionpsrovidedwiththeA - BUSremote NavigationButton _ untilthedesiredvolume capableof sendingonesourceto a secondzonein modulesorkeypadsA . dditionainl formationwillalsobe bvelforthemultiroomsystemis enteredD . ONOT thehousewhilea separatesourceis listenedto inthe madeavailablethroughtheHarmanKardonWebsite usetheregularvolumecontrolknobsforthissetting . at www . harmanka _ don . com . mainroom . Inadditionto providingforcontrool ver Whenallsettingsforthemultiroomsetuphavebeen theselectionof theremotesourceanditsvolumet , he madep , ressthe A / • NavigationButton _ until RS - 232Control thecursoris nextto the BA CK T 0 MAS TE R AVB435 offersa comprehensivraengeof optionsfor TheAVR435 is rareamongA / Vreceiversinthatit poweringthespeakersinthesecondzone . MEN U line , ifyouhavenootheradlustmenttso providesthecapabilittyor fullremotecontroflrom make , presstheOSDButtondj ] Dto exitthemenu • UsingthelinedeveMl ultiroomAudioOutputs9 , compatiblecomputersorspecializerdemotecontrol system . theselectedsourcemaybefedto optionale , xternal systemsB . S 232 programminrgequiresspecialized poweramplifiersthatmaybematchedto the programminkgnowbd % andforthatreasonwerec Surround Channel Amplifier Assignment specificsof theinstallation . ommendthatit onlybedonebyqualifiedinstallers . TheAVB435 is equippedwithsevenfull power FormoreintormatioonnusingtheBS - 232portfor • Whenthemainroomsystemisconfiguredfor5 . 1 amplifbrchannelsto allowfor complete7 . 1 channel remotecontrol , visittheHarmanKsdonWebsiteat operationth , eSun - ounBdackLeft / Bighat mplifier operationH . oweverif , yoursystemisonlyconfigured www . harlnankardorl . coomrcontactourcustomer channelms aybeusedto powertheremotezoneso for 5.1 channelisnthemainlisteningroom , youmay servicedepartment . thatnoadditionaal mplifierasrerequired . takeadvantageof the " extra " twochannelsbyusing themto powerspeakersplacedina secondzone Multiroom Setup • UsingbuibinA - BUSReadytechnologyo , ptional locationT , hisenableysouto usethemultiroomoapabili OncetheaudioandIBlinkconnechonhsavebeen A BUSmodulesmaybeconnectedto theAVB435 tiesof theAVR435 withoutthecostof anadditional , viaa singleCategory5 / 5e wire , sothatremote madet , heAVB435 needsto beconfigurefdormull externapl oweramplifier . zonespeakersmaybepowereddirectlyfromthe roomoperationP . resstheOSDButton _ to bring TochangethesettingsothattheSurroundBack A BUSmodulewithouttheneedforadditional theMAS TE R ME NU ( Figure1 ) to thescreen . amplifbrsarefedbythesourceselectedthrough powe _ I , Bsensororvolumecontrowl iresto be Pressthe • NavigationButtonqi ] _ , untiltheon - theMultiroomsystemratherthantheSBL / SBB runto thesecondzone . screen . - ) cursoris nextto the MUL T I - R0 0 M channelsof themainroom , makecertainthatthe line . ResstheSetButton _ to enterthe Inadditiont , heAVB435 includesa remoteIBsensor MULTI - ROOM SETUP menu ( Figure23 ) MU L T I - R0 0 M menu ( Figure23 ) . inputso thatremoteconl _ ocl ommandfsromthe isonthescreena , ndthenpressthe A / • f ZoneIIremoteincludedwiththeunitmaybe11ansmitted MULTI - ROOM SETUP NavigationButton @ sothatthecursoris pointto to theunit , whilestandardIB input / outpujat cksallow the SB A MP S line . PresstheA / • Navigation - + MULTI - ROOM : _ ON theremotezone'scommandtso besentto compatibb MULTI IN : _ Button @ sothatMUL T T isshowninhighlight MULTI VOL : - 25dB IRconl _ olledsourcedevices . edvideoW . henthischangeis madec , onnectthe SB AMPS : _ MULTI wiresfeedingthespeakersintheremotezoneto the BACK TO MASTER MENU Installation SurroundBack / MultiroomSpeakerOutletsi ] _ . Althoughsimpbremoteroomsystemsmaybe NotethatwhentheSBL / SBBspeakerasresettot instalbdbytheaveragedo - ityourselhf obbyist , \ mulllroomoperationy , oumaystillconfigurethe thecomplexityof yourmultizondmultireosmystem AVB435 for 7.1 modesinthemainlisteningroomby @ ure23 involvesrunningwiresinsideofwalbwheretheservices makingcertainthatthe SU RR B AC K lineinthe of a speciallyt _ ainedinstallermayberequired . SPEAKER SIZE menu ( Figure15 ) is setto Whenthe MUL T I - R 0 0 M menuappearst , he Bega _ dbsosf whodoesthework , pleaseremember cursorwillbeat theMU L T I - R0 0 M line , Since S MA L L or L AR GE , asshownintheinstructions thatlocalbuildingcodesmaygovernin wallelectrical onpage27 . Whenthatis donethewordMUL TI thislineisusedto turnthesystemonandoff , don't work , includingproperspecificatioonf anywiringused willappearnextto thelargeorsmalldesignatotro makeanadjustmenhtereunlessyouwishto turnthe andthewayinwhichit is connectedY . ouarerespon - alertyouto thefactthattheinternaSl BL ! SBRampli systemonatthistime . Toturnthesystemon , pressthe siblefor makingcertainthatallmultimeminstallation fiefsareassignedto themultiroomsystema , ndthat • NavigationButton _ sothat0 N ishighlighted . workis doneproperlyandincompliancwe ithallappli anoptionale , xterna1l wechannepl oweramplifiermust if youdo notwishto turnthesystemonat 11 % l _ meor cabbcodesandregulations . beconnectedto theSBL / SBRPreampOutputs _ ] 1 to pToceetdo thenextstep , pressthe • Navigation ino _ derto usesurroundbackchanneslpeakers Button _ oncesothatthe . - ) onscreencursoris Forstandardinstallationfso , llowtheinstructionsshown nexttothe MULTI IN line . Oncethissettingis made , pressthe A / • onpages17 18fortheconnectionof speakewr ire NavigationButton _ to selectanotherconfigura andIB remotewiringto theAVB435 . Atthe MU L T I I N line , pressthe _ / • Navigation tionitemonthispage , or presstheOSDButton Button _ untilthedesiredinputto themultimom ForinstallationwsheretheSurroundBackLeft / Bight ifyouhavecompletedyouradjustmenttso theMulti systemappearsinthehighlightevdideo . Whenthe amplifierchannelasreusedto powertheemotezone , roomsystem . selectionhasbeenmadep , ressthe • Navigation makecertainthatthesystemisconfiguredforthat Button _ oncesothatthecursoris nextto the typeof operationa , sshownonthispage . MULTI VOL line .
Page: 42

MULTI ROOM OPERATION adjustedusinganoptionaIlRsensorandtheZoneII front - paneilndicatorasndtheaccentlightingaround Multiroom Operation remoteintheremotelocationo , rtheA BUSkeypad , thevolumecentrawl illturnoff , a 11U L T I 0 N WhenoperatingtheAVR435 froma remoteroom orontheoptionaal udiopoweramplifiecronnectedto messagwe illremainin theLower DisplayLine [ ] locationwherea , nIRsensorlinkhasbeenconnected theMultiroomAudio Outputs9 , andthelightingaroundtheStandby / Onswitchwill totheAVR435 ' s rearpanelMultiroomIRInput _ . . _ , remainbluewhentheunitis intheStandbymodein youmayuseeitherthemainremotecontrool r the Althoughchangesto theinputsourceorremoteroom themainroomto remindyouthatpowerisstillapplied ZoneMremoteT . oturnonthemultiroomfeed , press volumewillnormallybe madeusinganIRsensorin to theunit , andthatit is beingusedfor Multimom theAVRSelector _ @ to turntheunitonto the theremoteroomthatis connectedto theAVR , itis operationelsewherienthehouseR . emembetrhatif lastsourceo , ranyoftheotherSelectorButtons alsopossibleto changetnosesettingsfromthemain youturntheunitcompleteloyffbypressingtheMain @ ( _ ) O _ ( _ ) to 1urnonto a specificsource . listeningroom . Thisis usefulforsituationwsheresome PowerSwitch [ ] , thefeedto thesecondzonewill alsobeturnedoft orallof theremoteroomsdonothaveanIRsensoT , AslongasanIRfeedto theAVR435 hasbeen orto takecontrolovertheremoteroomwithouat ctu - establishefdromtheremoteroom , usinganyof the WhentheAVR435 is turnedoffin themainroom , allybeinginthatroom . buttonsoneitherremotewillcontrotlheremoteloca - theMultiroomsystemmaybeturnedonatanytime tionvolume ( ] _ 0 , changethetunerf _ equency bypressingtheMultiroomButton _ , or anyof the Inadditionto usingthe11UL T I R0 0 11menua , s _ , changethetunerpreset _ ( _ ormute SelectorButtons @ @ ( _ ) intheremoteroom . shownonthepreviouspage , youmaychangethe theoutput _ q _ 14 . sourceor volumeintheremotezoneusingthe remote . PresstheMultiroomButton _ onthe IftheRemoteIROutputJack _ ontheAVR435 remotea , ndwhenthe 11U L T I 0 N / 0 F F rues is connectedto anIRInputjackoncompallbb sageappearsintneonscreendisplayandtheLower HarmanKatdonaudiocomponentssuchasCD , DVD DisplayLine _ ' _ 1 , presstheSetButton _ and orcassetteplayerst , hetranspodfu : nctionsof those thenpressthe A / V NavigationButton _ to machinesmayalsobecontrolledusingtheTransport togglepastthatmessageto 11U L T I L E VE L or Controls _ ) _ ] _ ( _ ( _ ( _ ) _ ] 1 _ oneither MULTI INPUT . remotecontrol . Tochangetheremotemom'sinputsoumew , hen Toturnthesystemofffromtheremoteroom , press MU L T I I NP UT appearsp , resstheSet Button thePower Off ButtonCO . Remembetrhatthe _ , andthenpresstheA / V NavigationButton AVR435 maybeturnedonorofffromtheremote untilthedesiredinputappearsintheon screen room , regatdbssof thesystem'soperationorstatusin displayandintheLower DisplayLine _ " _ J , themainroom . Remembetrhatonlyanalogor PCMinputsources maybeselectedforusewiththeMultiroomsystem . NOTEW : henthetuneris selectedasthesourcefor DolbyDigitaol r DTSsourcesare notavailablteo the theremotezonea , nychangeto thefrequencyorpre Multiroomsystem . setwillalsochangethestationbeinglistenedto inthe mainroom , ifthetuneris inusethere . Similarlyif , Tochangetheremoteroom'svolumew , hen someoneinthemainroomchangesthestationt , he MU L T I L EV EL appearsp , resstheSet Button changewinalsohaveanimpactontneremotemorn . qi _ i _ , andpressthe A / V NavigationButton to changethevolumeseltingN . otethatthisvolume ToturnontheMultiroomsystemfromthemainlisten adjustmenctontrolsthelevelfor theoutputto the ingroom , whichis necessarbyeforeanyA - BUSprod MultiroomAudio Outputs _ ) andforanyspeakers uctsconnectedto theAVRmaybeused , pressthe connectedto theSurroundBacWMultiroom MultiroomButton _ ontheremoteW . henthe SpeakerOutputs @ whentheSurroundBackam - I1U L TI 0 N / 0 FF messageappearsinthe plifierchannelasreconfiguredforMultiroomuse , as onscreendisplayandtheLower DisplayLine _ " _ lj , shownonpage41 ThisadjustmendtoesNOTchange presstheSetButton _ andthenpresstheA / V thevolumelevelforanyroomwhereanA - BUS NavigationButton _ sothatdisplaychangesto moduleis used , asthatsettingis onlyadjustabluesing 11U L TI 0 N PresstheSet Button _ againto theA - BUSmodule'svolumecontrolora remote activatethesettingN . otethatthismethodmaybe pointedat theA BUSmodule'sbuiltqnsensor . usedto turntheMultiroomsystemonoroffeven whentheAVRis intheStandbymodeinthemain OncetheMultiroomsystemis turnedon , itwillremain listeningroom . oneveniftheAVR435 isplacedintheStandby modeinthemainroomby pressingthePowerOff WhentheMuboomsystemisturnedon , theinput Button _ or theMainPowerSwitch [ ] onthe selectedusingtheMulSroommenuwillbefedto the frontpanel . MultiroomAudioOutputs € _ ' ontherearpanelas wellastheA - BUSConnectorQ . Thevolumewillbe TheMultiroomsystemwillremainoneveniftheunitis assetinthepreviousselectiona , lthoughit mayalsobe turnedoffin themainroom . Inthatevent , although
Page: 43

CONFIGURING THE REMOTE TheAVR435 remoteisfactoryprogrammedtor S . Afteryoupressandrebasethenumberkey . allfunctionsneededto operatetheunit . Inaddition , watchthedevicebeingprogrammedto see I STELUECT _ DEH ] CE _ . I whetheritturnsoftAsshownintheinstructions it isalsopreprogrammetodoperatemostrecent Figure26 HarmanKardonDVDplayersandchangersC , D thatwillappearonthenextmenuscreen player - asndchangersC , Drecordersandcassette ( Figure30 ) . if yourdevicehasturnedoff , press NOTET : hecodesfor harddriverecordeprroducts decksT . hecodesfor otherbranddevicesmaybe theSet Buttonqi _ ii _ a , ndthenskipto Step1O . If ( PVRs ) uchasT # o _ andReplayTV ® areprogrammed programmedintotheAVR435 remoteusingits theunitdoesnotturnoft proceedto thenextstep bysabcbngVCRasthedeviceF . orsatellitebasedWo extensivleibraryof remotecodesora head - tohead productsc , heckunderthebrandnameof theproduct . learningprocessforcodesnotin theinternallibrary . I PHOk'EHEFX ' ! T _ L ] F _ 7OR v [ : L _ SET A [ 5 . Atthenextmenuscreenontheremote ( Fig . 27 ) . Figur3e0 presstheSet Button _ to entertheManual Thanksto theremote'sadvancedtechnologyand modew . hichmeansthatyouwillselectthebrand lwo lineLCDdisplayi , tis nolongernecessartyo ifthedevicebeingprogrammedintotheAVR nameof thedevicefromthelistprogrammedinto lookupcumbersomceodeswhenprogrammintghe remotedoesnottumoffafteryouhavepressed theremote'smemory . remote ; followingthestepsoutlinedbelow , yousimply the " 1 " ButtonQ . repeaSt teps7 andS by saarohforthebrandnamefromtheremote'smemory . pressingtheavailablenumerickeysshownuntil I ° _ ! Rt _ ° H ' ; LR [ A _ LM ° cu ' cc A [ thedeviceturnsoft . Ifthedevicestilldoesnotturn Werecommendthatyoufirsttrythepreprogrammed Figure27 codeentrymethod . Ifthatprocedureis notsuccessful , offafterallchoiceshavebeentried , or ifthereis thentry thecodelearningmethod . onlyonenumberkeyshownasavailablteo try , 6 . Thenextmenuscreenontheremote ( Figure28 ) thecodeforthisspecificdeviceis notintheAVR willshowthestartof thelist ofavailablebrands . Preprogrammed Code Entry remotelibraryunderthatbrandname . Ifthatis the PresstheA / T NavigationButtons _ until case , presstheClearButton _ to exitthe Theeasbstwayto programtheremotefor operation thebrandnameof thedeviceyouareprogram manuapl rogramminmg ode . Remembetrhatthe witha soumedevicefromanothebr randisto follow ruingintotheremoteappearsonthelowerlineof codesmaystillbestoredintheAVRremote's thesesteps : thedisplayandthenpresstheSetButtonqi _ iJ . libraryunderanotherbrand , andyoucanhavethe remotecontrasl earchfor thembyfollowingthe 1 . Turnonthepowertothedeviceyouwishto pm I SELECT £ R { IHEI I _ 12 _ A instructionbselowforautomaticprogrammingY . ou gramintotheAVRremoteT . hisis importanat , sina Figure28 mayalsomanuall " ylearn " thecodesfor most laterstepyouwillneedtoseewhethetrhedevice devicesintotheAVRremotebyfollowingthe turnsoffto determinwehethetrheremotehasbeen NOTE : If thebrandnamefortheproductyouwishto LearningCommandisnstructionosnpage44 . programmefdortheproperremotecodes . programdoesnotappearinthelist . thecodesmay stillbeavailablea , ssomemanutacturesrsharecodes . 10 . Whenthedevicebeingprogrammeddoesturnoff 2 . PressandholdtheProgramButton _ for If thedesiredbrandis notlisted , presstheClear aftera numerickeyhasbeenpressedy , oumust aboutthreesecondswhilethemessageshown Button _ to exittheprogramminpgrocess , presstheSet Button _ withinfivesecondsto inFigure24 appearsintheremote'sLCD andskipto theinstructionsshownonpage44 forthe enterthesettingintotheremote'smemoryA . fter InformationDisplayO . Releasethebutton " Automaticm " ethodof programmintgheremoteI . f youpresstheSetButton qi _ iJ , thetop lineof the whentheredlightundertheSet Button desiredo , rif thecodesfor yourbrandare notpart LCDdisplaywillreadSaUIttG . . . andthenthe appears . of theremote'slibraryat all , youmays11u1sethe wordS , aO , EDwillflashfourtimesinthecenterof remoteto programmostinfrared - controlbpdroducts thebottomline . F 0 F < : _ _ S E C 014 El S [ HOLD PROCBurro , _ 1 by " learningt " hecommandsfromtheproduct's Figur2e4 originarlemoteintotheAVRremoteT . heinstructions 11 . Whenthecodesaresavedt , heremotewillreturn forLearningCommandsareon page44 . to normaloperationa , ndwheneveyroupressthe 3 . Theremote ' sM _ IM MEMU message Input SelectorButton _ thatwasjustpro ( Figure25 ) . willappearintheLCDdisplayand 7 . Thenextstepis importanta , sit determinews hich g _ ammedth , ecodesforthenewdevicewillbe theSetButton _ willremainilluminated codeswillopeTattehesourcedeviceor display . used . If nofurtherbuttonsarepressedt , he inred . PresstheSetButton _ to begin PointtheAVRremoteatthedevicebeingpro remotewillrevertbackto thedefaultsettingfor theprocessof selectinga deviceandlocating grammedand . followingtheinstrucSonsshownin AVRcommands . theproperremotecodes . theremote'sLODInformationDisplayO . pressandreleasetheNumeric Keys0 shown NOTES : omebrandssharea commonremoteconhol , F _ ' ! Ai ? IO [ GIR _ MMEHU [ IE _ JICE A 1 onthemenuscreen ( Figure29 ) oneat a time , codetot " PowerOff " for manymodels . Forthatreason startingwiththe " 1 " buttonA . fteryoupressthe Figur2e5 itis possiblethateventhoughtheremoteappearsto " 1 " Buttonqi1 _ . theremote'sLCDscreenwill beproperlyprogrammedy , oumayfindthatsomebut 4 . SELECT _ DEL . _ ICEwillappearinthe LCD brieflygoblankasthecodeis beingtransmitted . tonsdonotappearto issuethecorrectcommandI . f display ( Figure26 ) . PresstheA / T Navigation butyouwillseethe " transmiti " con [ ] inthe thisisthecase , repeattheprocedureoullinedabove . Button _ to scrollthroughthelistof device upperrightcornerof thedisplayto serveas butifmorethanonenumerickeyselectionissuggested categoriesandpresstheSet Button _ when confirmatiotnhattheremoteis sendingout inStep7 , try a differennt umberto seewhetherthe thedeviceyouwishto setthecodesforappears . commands , remoteoperatescorrectlyA . lthoughtheAVRremoteis Forthisexamplew , ewillselect " TV " toenterthe preprogrammewdithanextensivelibraryof codesfor codesneededto operateyourTX4 I PCR0E [ SIgS ! 10 _ FHIJIM0BEP 1 manymajorbrandsi , tis alsopossiblethatyoumay havealtemptedto programa productthatistoo new Figure29
Page: 44

CONFIGURING THE REMOTE ortooold , andthusnotallof itscommandswillbein display'stoplineto remindyouthattheremoteis pressingandthenreleasintghebuttonto see whetherthenewdeviceturnsbackon , Whenit thecodelibraryYoumayfillinthecodesforanybutton workingeventhoughyoumaynotseeanything thatdoesnotoperateproperlybyusingthelearning happenintgo thedevicebeingprogrammed . does , skipto thenextstep , Howeveri , fyoutryall techniqueshownonthispage . 10numerickeysandfindthattheunitwillnotturn Y . Itwilltakea tewsecondsfortheremoteto send on , youwon'tbeableto usethismethodto pro - outthefirstgroupof commandsa , fterwhichyou Automatic Code Entry gramthedevicePresstheClearButton _ to willseea newdisplayin theLCDscreena , s exittheprogramminpgrocessYou'llneedto follow Inadditionto manuaclodeselectionusingthebrand shownin Figure32 . Followintgheinstructionsif , theLearningCommandinsstructionbselowto enter namelist , it isalsopossibleto automaficasllyearch thedevicebeingprogrammedhasnotturnedoff , thecodestotthisdeviceintotheAVRremote , throughallthecodesthatarestoredintheAVBremote's pressthe • NavigationButton _ againto libran / toseewhethear devicewillrespondevenifit 12 . Whenpressingoneof thenumerickeysinStep sendanothergroupof codes . Ifthedevicebeing is notlistedamongthebrandsf : saat ppeawr henyou 10or 11causesthedevicebeingprogrammed programmehdasturnedoff , skipto Step9 . programtheremotemanuallTy . oautomaficasllyearch to turnbackon , followtheinstrucfionsshownin throughthecodesthatareavailablfeoraspecificdevice Figure32 andpresstheSet Button _ within I PYO - > _ JER ! - - o OF _ [ I : 7 > A 1 type ( e . g . , DVDV , CR ) t , ollowthesesteps : fivesecondsofthedeviceturningon . Afteryou Figur3e2 presstheSetbutton , thetoplineof theLCDdis 1 . Turnonteepowetro thedeviceyouwishto playwillreadS _ UIiIG . . . andthenthewo _ d S . Bypressingthe • NavigationButton programintotheAVBremoteT , hisisimportant S _ UED willflashfourtimesinthecenterof the again , theremotewillsendouta newsetof becauseina laterstepyouwillneedto seewhether bottomline . commandsW . henitpausesf , ollowtheinstructions thedewceturnsoffto determinwehethetrheremote showninStep7 . Dependinognhowmanycodes hasbeenprogrammefdortheproperremotecodes . 1S.Whenthecodesaresaved , theremotewillreturn arestoredfora specificdevicetype , youmay to normaloperationa , ndwheneveyroupress 2 . PressandholdtheProgramButton _ for haveto repeatthisprocessasmanyas 15times . theInput SelectorButton _ thatwasjust aboutthreesecondswhilethemessageshown Remembeirf , thedeviceturnsoff , skipto Step9 . programmedth , ecodestorthenewdevicewill in Figure24 appearsintheremote'sLOD Whenallthecodesfor thedevicebeingpm beused . Ifnofurtherbuttonsarepressedt , he InformationDisplayO . Releasethebutton grammedhavebeentried , theinstructiosnhown remotewillrevertbackto thedefaultseltingfor whentheredlightundertheSetButton inFigure33 willappearT . hismeansthatthe AVBcommands . appears . codesfor theproducyt ouaretryingto program Learning Commands arenotintheAVRremotelibran / andyouwill 3 , Theremote ' slt _ Itl ltEilU message ( Fig , 25 ) haveto " learn " themintotheremotefollowingthe OnoccasionswhentheAVRremotedoesnotcontain willappearintheLCDdisplayandtheSetButton insl _ ucfionsshowninthe nextsection . Pressthe thecodesfora particulapr roduct'sremoteinitsbuilt willremainilluminateidn red . PresstheSet Set Button _ as instructetdo exitthe inlibran / o , rwhenyouwishto programa missingor Button _ to begintheprocessof selectinga programminpgrocess . speciaflunctionintoonebuttonof a devicet , heAVB deviceandIocafingtheproperremotecodes . remote'slearningcapabilityallowsyouto dothat . To I _ EACH CMD POIHT i teachcommandfsromoneproduct'sremoteintothe 4 . SELECT _ DEUICEwillappearinthe LCD AVBremote : display ( Figure2 , 6 ) . PresstheA / T Navigation Figur3e3 Button _ to scrollthroughthelistof device TheAVR435 ' s remotenotonlyallowsyouto " learn " 9 . Ifthedevicebeingprogrammeddoesturnoft categoriesandpresstheSet Button _ when inthecommandsfromanycompafibleremote ; italso afterfoMowintgheinstructionisnStep7 , you thedeviceforwhichyouwishto setthecodes allowsyouto learna separatecodeintotheInput willneedto verifl / thecodesetby pressingthe appearsF . orthisexamplew , ewillselect " TV " to SelectorButtonsq _ ] D . Thisuniquecapabilityallows NumericKeys _ insequencea , s instructedin enterthecodesneededto operateyour17 / . youto configuretheremotesothatwheneveorneof Figure32 . Pointtheremoteatthedevicebeing thesebuttonsis pressedt , heremotewillnotonly 5 . At thenextmenuscreenontheremotep , ressthe programmeda , ndpressthe " 1 " Button _ to selectthecodesforthatdevicefor itself , butit win seewhetherthedevicelsrnsbackon . • NavigationButton _ sothatthebottomline transmiat separatelpyrogrammedremotecode . This d theLCDdisplayreads _ UTO ( Figure31 ) and 10 . Afterpressi % andreleasingthe " 1 " Button isparticularlvyaluablewhenyoursystemincludesa thenpresstheSetButton _ to enterthe checkto seewhethetrhedevicehasturnedback sourcesuchasa cablebox , satellitereceiveror DVD Automatipcrogramminmgode . on . Ifit has , skipto Step12 . If itdoesnotlsrnoff , playewr ithanHDMIor DVIoutputthatis connected pressthe " 2 " Button0 , orthenextbuttonin directyto yourvideodisplayB . yprogrammintghe thenumericsequenceifyouarerepeatingthe d / sp / _ y _ inputselectionremotecodeforthespecific Figure31 procedurea , sinstructedbytheLCDscreenin devicey , oucan , forexamplep , resstheVID3 / Cable Figure34 . InputSelectorButtonE ] P andnotonlyhavethe 6 , As instructedonthenextmenuscreenp , ress AVBswitchto a cableset - topforaudioselectionand the • NavigationButton _ to beginthe Y > SET l'i > ! - - _ I P 0 _ JC r ; ! 0 117 havetheAVRremoteuseremotecodesforthecable I automaticcodesearchprocessY . ourconfirmation box , butyoucansenda codeto thedisplaythat thattheremoteis sendingoutcommandsisthe Figur3e4 selectstheHDMIorDVIinputusedtora directcon - movemenotf a squareblockacrossthetop line . Whenpressingthe ' 7 " buttondoesnotturn nectionbetweentheset topandyourdisplay . of theLCDdisplayscreenwhilethebottomline thedevicebeingprogrammedbackon , repeat readsPLEASE t , J _ IT . . . . Youwillalsoseethe Beforelearningcodes , notethatallbuttonsonthe theprocedurebytying theremaindeorf the transmiitconintheupperrightcornerof theLCD remotemayhavea command " learnede " xceptfor NumericKeys 0 in sequencee , achtime
Page: 45

CONFIGURING THE REMOTE | Clear @ , Program _ , Light _ andthe AVBremotey , oumaypresstheSet Button TO PRI ] CR _ M to barnadditionaclodesfromthebuttonsona MacroButtons _ . J sourceremoteintotheA \ / Remote . FellowSteps Figure37 Thelearningprocessrequiresthatboththedevice's 5 through9 as oftenasneededto completethe originarlemoteandtheAVRremotebeavailable . 6 . Onceyoupressthebuttonto beprogrammedon codelearningprocess . Beforepressinganybuttonsoneitherremotep , lace theAVRremotep , ressandholdthebuttononthe 11 . If youwishto changethenamethatappearsin themsothattheIRt _ ansmitteorntheremotefromthe remotecontroflorthedeviceto beprogrammed theLCDdisplaywhenthebuttonthathasjust deviceto beprogrammedis facingtheInfraredLens within5 secondsa , s instructedonthenextmenu hada newcodelearnedis preseedp , ressthe ontheAVRremoteT . he1weremetesshouldbe screen ( Figure38 ) . • NavigationButton _ sothatthedisplay nomorethananinchapart , andthereshouldnotbe showninFigure42 appearsintheLCDdisplay . anydirectsunlighot rotherbrightlightsourcenearthe I PIDRiE ? ISGSIH K _ EL5 _ EOMNOTE I PresstheSet Button _ to betakento a remotes . Figure38 REirI , _ MEKE _ displayE . nterthenewnamefor LearningKeysfor anEntireDeviceRemote thekeyfollowingtheinstructionsshowninthe 7 . ContinuteoholdthebL £ onontileoriginarlemote RenamingIndividuaKleyssectionof thismanual 1 . PressandholdtheProgramButton _ for untlthemenuontheAVRremote'LsCDscreen onpages50 - 51 . ifyoufindit moreconvenientto aboutthreesecondswhilethemessageshown changesIf . thecodeissuccessfullelyarnedy , ouwill renamethebuttonsata latertime , youmaydo inFigure24 appearsintheremote'sLCD seethedisplayshowninFigure39 . ifyouseethat thatseparatelybyfollowingtheinstrucllenosn InformationDisplayO . Releasethebutton messagper , oceedtoStep10 . iftilecodeis not page50 . whentheredlightundertheSet Button successfubllyamedy , ouwillseethedisplayshown appears . inFigure40 . Ifthatmenuappearsp , roceedto I REEHA _ RMHL - MEBH'JE5 I StepsSand9 . 2 . Theremote ' sMaIN MEtIU message ( Fig . 25 ) , Figur4e2 willappearintheLCDdisplayandtheSetButton I L € _ RH MEHU I LF - ! ! I _ HOTHER KE _ i willremainilluminateidn red . Pressthe • 12 . Whenyouhaveprogrammedallkeysforthe Figure39 NavigationButton _ onceso thatLEaRtt desireddevicep , ressthe • NavigationButton appearsonthebottomlineof theLCDscreena , s whenLE _ Rtl MEtlU ( Figure39 ) appears F ' E T i _ _ 5 A showninFigure35 . PresstheSetButton sothatyouseethedisplayshownin Figure43 . to begintheprocessof learningcommandfsrom PresstheSet Button _ to returntheremoteto Figure40 anotherdevice'sremoteintotheAVRremote . normaloperation . 8 . Ifthemessageshownin Figure40appearsin thedisplayp , resstheSet Button _ to try pro _ M _ IIl MEHU 1 L g A F - ! H , _ I LC _ RN M _ NU [ grammingthebuttonagain . Whentheremote Figure35 F _ gu4re3 promptsyouto pressandholdthekeyonthe originarlemoteagainby showingthedisplay 3 . Toprogramthecodesfora device'sremoteinto 13 . If youwishto programthecodesforanother showninFigure38 , immediatelpyressthebutton theAVRremote , pressthe • / T Navigation devicer , epeattheprocedureoutlineabove , but onthesourceremoteagain . Toavoidanother Buttons _ untilthewordsL EA I _ N K EY selecta differendt evicein Step4 . failedattempt , makecertainthatthewindowson appearinthebottomlineof theLCDdisplaya , s Learning Codesfor an Input Selector thelworemotesarefacingoneanother . showninFigure36 . PresstheSetButton to continuei , f youwishto programoneof the TheAVR435 ' s remoteallowsyouto learna specific 9 . ConSnueto holdthebuttonontile originarlemote InputSelectorbuttonsfora speciacl ode , fellow codeto beattachedto oneof theInputSelectors untiltheLCDdisplaychangesagain . If thecode theinstructionsshownbelowfor " DeviceSelector wassuccesdullylearnedy , ouwillseethedisplay _ ] _ sothatwhenevetrhatbuttonis pressedy , ouwill Pregramming't showninFigure39 . inthatcase , goto Step10 . netonlybeselectingthatdeviceastheAVR'sinput andtellingtheremoteto usetheremotecodesthat iftheLE _ F . ' . tlFAILED display ( Figure40 ) havebeenprogrammetdo belongto thatdevicei , talso appearsagain , youmayeithertry to programthe I Lc _ RH 1 LEARN KE5 , & allowsyouto havethatspeciacl odetransmitteda , s keyagain , orpressthe • NavigationButton Figure36 well . Thisallowsyouto haveaninput ( orothercorn to stoptheprocessi , t ispossiblethatsome remotesmayusecodesequenceosr infraredfre mand ) sentto a displaysothatwhenvideosources 4 . TheSELECT _ DEUICEmessagwe illappear aredirectlyconnectedto thedisplayy , oucanauto quenciesthatarenotcompablewiththeAVR intheLCDdisplay ( Figure26 ) . Pressthe • / T maticallcyommanditto switchto thesameinput remotea , ndthosecodescannotbelearned . NavigationButtons _ to scrollthroughthelist selectedfor theA \ / R . WhenthedisplayshowninFigure41 appears , of devicecategorieasndpresstheSetButton presstheSet Button _ to exitthe Learning whenthedeviceforwhichyouwishto setthe _ , _ barna remotecodeintooneof theInput system . codesappearsF . orthisexamplew , ewillselect " IV " Selectors _ , tollowthesamestepsshownabove to enterthecodesneededto epelateyourT { . for learningthekeysfor anentiredeviceremotewith I Lg _ EI _ rRH FAILED A 1 5 . Thenextmenuscreen ( Figure37 ) willpromptyou thefollowingexceptions : Figure41 to selecttheburton , or " key , " ontheAVRremote • inStep3 , presstheA / V NavigationButtons thatyouwishto programP . ressthatbuttonon 10 . Whena codehasbeenlearnedsuccessfullyyo , u untilL EA I _ N 1 ) E VIC E appearsin the theAVRremote . havea numberof ep % ns . Whenthedisplay boitomlineof theLCDdisplay . shownin Figure39 isontheLCDscreenonthe
Page: 46

CONFIGURING THE REMOTE reassignintghecommandsusedfora particular ontheremote'sLCDInformationDisplay0 , , , WhentheS EL EC T A D EV I C E message device . pressandreleasetheNumericKeys _ oneat ( Figure26 ) appeama , s describedinStep4 , press atime , startingwiththe " 1 " ButtonqiD . After thespecificInput SelectorButtonO thatyou I MItZ _ HI _ HHF _ L - ME [ iUD EUIIZ : E A I youpressthe " 1 " ButtonqiD , theremota's wishto havetransmiat speciacl odewhenit is LCDscreenwillbrieflygoblankasthecodeis pressed . Figur4e4 beingtransmittedb , utyouwillseethe " transmit " , , WhentheR EN AME D EV I C E optionis 3 . Thenextmenudisplayis whereyouselectthe iconintheupperrightcornerof thedisplayto offeredbytheremoteafterthecodeispro InputSelect , ordevicet , hatyouwishto change . serveasconfirmatiotnhattheremoteis sending grammedy , ouwillbechangingthenamethatis outcommands . WhenthedisplayshowninFigure45 appears , shownintheremote'sLCDdisplayeverytimethat pressthe • / T NavigationButton _ to scroM 7 . Afteryoupressandreleasethenumberkey , InputSelectoris pressed . throughthelistto findthedeviceyouwishto use watchthedevicebeingprogrammedto see foranotherfunctionI . nthiscasewewillselect Changing Devices whetheritturnsoftAsshownintheinstructions " _ " andshowhowto changeitto takeonthe thatwillappeaor nthenextmenuscreen ( Fig30 ) , Inthefactorydefaultsetlngs , theAVRremoteis codesfor operatingaVCR . Whenthatdevice's presstheSet Button _ , andthenskipto programmedsothatthecommandtsransmitted nameappearspresshe SetButton Step9 . Iftheunitdoesmtturn off , proceedto correspondto thedeviceselectedbypressingone thenextstep . ofthe InputSelectors _ ] P . Thisis logical , asyou l OT ! LU _ BPL - TBEM ] CE _ " 1 wanttheremoteto controtlhedeviceyouhaveselected S . IfthedevicebeingprogrammedintotheAVR Figur4e5 Howeverin , somecircumstanceysoumayhavecon remotedoesnottumoffafteryouhavepressed figuredyoursystemsothatthedevicesconnectedto 4 . Oncethe " old " devicefypehasbeenselected , the " 1 " Button _ , continueSteps6 and7 by theAVR435 donotcorrespondto thedefaultdevice youneedto telltheremotewhichsetof remote pressingtheavailablenumerickeysshownunSl settingsandthelegendsprintedontheremote . For codestouseasa replacemefnotrthedevicejust thedeviceturnsoft Ifthedevicestilldoesnotturn exampleif , yoursystemhastwoVCRsyoumaycon - selectedW . hentheinstructionsshowninFigure . offafterallchoiceshavebeentried , thecodefor nectthesecondVCRto theVID2 input . Thereisno 46appearp ; ressthe • / T NavigationButton thisspecificdeviceis notintheAVRremote probbmindoingthat , butinnormaloperationthe to scrollthroughthelistof devicecategories libraryunderthatbrandnameI . fthatis thecase , commandisssuedafterselectingtheVID2 inputare to findthenameof thedevicethatyouwishto wesuggestthatyoupresstheSet Button fora televisionn , ota VCR . use . Theolddevicenamewillremainontheleft to acceptthecodesfromanotherbrandsothat TheAVRremotea41owysouto correctthatsituation sideof theLCDscreenw , hilethereplacement theprogrammingiscompletedb , utremember throughthe " ChangingDevicesp " rocessT . hisenables devicelistwinscrollto itsright . Forexamplep , ress thatyouwillthenhaveto programtheremote youto assignthecodesfromonetypeof deviceto the • NavigationButton _ untilthedisplay manuallbyyfollowingtheLearningCommands adifferentbutton . Forexamplei , n thestepsbelow , screenreadsTLI < - t ) CR to havetheVID2 / _ insl _ uctionosnpage44 . wewillexplainhowto prog / amtheVID2 buttonsto Buttont _ ansmtiht ecommandsusedto controla providethecommandsto operateaVCR . Ofcourse , 9 . Whenthedevicebeingprogrammeddoesturnoff VCR . PresstheSetButton _ whenthe youmayprogramtheremoteto haveanyof the aftera numerickeyhasbeenpressedy , oumust desireddevicecombinatioanppears . presstheSet Button _ withinfivesecondsto devicestakeonthecodesetof anyotherdevicea , s yoursystemrequiresA . nd , withtheAVRremota's enterthesettingintotheremota'smemoryA . fter I ! TIUE < I . ! [ ( JICE _ [ ; ' IICE T _ F'E , A 1 " Renamef " unctionyoucanevenchangetheway youpresstheSetbutton , thetoplineof theLCD Figur4e6 thenameof thedeviceappearsontheremote'sLCD displaywillreadSe ( JIttG . . . andthentheword S _ L _ EDwillflashfourtimesinthecenterof the displaysothatyouseeexactlywhichcommandasre 5 . Oncethenewdeviceieselectedt , heremaindeorf bottomline . beingsent . theprocesswillselectthecodesforthespecific Toprogramthebuttonsnormallayssignedto one brandto beused , andforthatreasontheyare 10 . Whenthecodesaresavedtheremotewinreturn deviceforthecommandsofanotherf , ollowthese identicatol thewaya deviceis programmeudsing to normaloperationa , ndwheneveyroupress steps : manuael ntry . Continuetheprocessasoutlinedin theInput SelectorButton _ thatwasjust thenextfewsteps , rememberintghatifthecodes programmedth , edisplaywillshowtheoriginal 1 . PressandholdtheProgramButton @ for for yourspecificdevicearenotfound , youmay aboutthreesecondswhilethemessageshown devicefypecodeatthetarleftsideof thedisplay , selectanybrandandthen " learn " theproper withthenameof thenewcodesettypeinbrackets . in Figure24 appearsintheremote'sLOD codesintotheAVRremoteusingtheprocessout Forexamplet , hedisplaywillreadTU < - L _ CR in InformationDisplay0 . Releasethebutton linedonpage44 . Tobegintheprocesss , tartby ourexampleof replacingtheTVcodeswiththose whentheredlightundertheSetButton selectingthebrandof devicea , sshownin Fig . 28 . fora VCR , appears . Pressthe • / T NavigationButton _ untilthe 2 . Theremote ' sM , _ Itl MEtlU message ( Fig . 25 ) , brandnameof thedeviceyouareprogramming Macro Programming willappearintheICD displayandtheSetButton intotheremoteappearsonthelowerlineof the Macrosenabbyouto easilyrepeatfrequentlyused willremainilluminateidn red . Pressthe • displayandthenpresstheSet Buttonqi _ iJ . combinationosf mullpleremotecontrocl ommands NavigationButton @ twicesothatCH , _ tIGE withthetouchof a singlebutton . Oncea macrois 6 . Thenextstepis importanta , sit determinews hich DEb _ ICEappearsonthebottomlineof the programmedy , oumaysendupto 20 commandws ith codeswilloperatethesourcedeviceor display . LCDscreena , sshownin Figure44 . Press onepressof thePowerOnorMacrobuttonsT . hiswill PointtheAVRremoteatthedevicebeingpro theSet Button _ to begintheprocessof g _ eatlysimplifytheprocessof lsrningonyoursystem , grammedand , followingtheinstructionsshown
Page: 47

CONFIGURING THE REMOTE changingdevicesorothercommontasks . Thanks • VID3 / Cable to theremote'stwo linedisplayi , tis easierthanever • PowerOn I SAELL / EPCT A [ IE _ EICE A I for youto takeadvantageof thepowerof macro • AVR _ Figure50 commands . • Logic7 6 . Thenextdisplay ( Figure51 ) iswhereyoubegin Recordinga Macro Aseachbuttonispressedto enteritintothe enteringtheindividuaclommandsforthemacro , macroy , ouwillseethebuttonnamesappearand Torecorda macrointotheremote'smemoryf , ollow intheorderyouwishthemto betransmitted . thenscrollupontheLCDdisplayasyourconfir thesesteps : Remembethr atwhenyouwantto changedevices , marionof thekeyentry ( Figure53 ) . youmustfirstpresstheInputSelectorsO 1 . PressandholdtheProgramButton _ for forthatbutton , andthenpresstheCommandor 10 . Whenallcommandfsor themacrohavebeen aboutthreesecondswhilethemessageshown Functiokney . Sincewewantto programa series enteredp , resstheSetButton _ to savethe inFigure24 appearsintheremote'sLOD of eventsthatoccureachtimethePoweOr n macroT . hedisplayscreenwillshowthebutton InformationDisplay0 . Releasethebutton buttonis pressedp , resstheAVRbutton . Inyour to whichthemacrohasbeenprogrammedand whentheredlightundertheSet Button specificmacrot , hisis thefirstcommandbutton . thenumberof stepsused , andthewordS _ UED appears . willblinkfourtimesinthelowerlineof theLCD 2 . The remote'sM _ Iirt MEMUmessage ( Fig . 25 ) , displayW . henthedisplayreturnsto normal , the willappearintheLCDdisplayandtheSetButton macrohasbeenenteredandtheremoteis ready Figure51 willremainilluminateidn red . Pressthe • foroperation . 7 . Thenextdisplay ( Figure52 ) andthesubsequent NavigationButton _ throetimessothat screensarewheretheactualmacroprogramming 11 . If a macrohasbeenprogrammedintothePower M _ CROappearsonthebottomlineof the On Button _ , itwillplaybackanytimethe LCDscreena , sshowninFigure47 . Pressthe takesplaceT . hewordsat theleftsideof thetop PowerOnbuttonis pressedA . sthemacroplays , Set Button _ to enterthemainmacro lineofthedisplayshowthebuttonthatis being menubranch . youwillseethestepsappearintheremote'sLCD programme ( de . g . , thePowerOn Button _ or displayM . acrosprogrammedintooneof thefour oneof theMacroButtons _ ) ) andtheindica I M _ I [ _ ME ! IU I tionat therightsideof thetoplineshowsthe discreteMacrobuttonsmaybeactivatedat any M _ C R 0 A timeby pressingtheappropriatbeutton . numbeor f macrostepsavailabloef 20 possible Figure47 steps . Followintgheinstructionosntheremote's LCDscreenp , ressthefirstkeyyouwishto be Erasinga Macro 3 . At thenextmenuscreen ( Figure4S ) pressthe Oncea macrohasbeencreatedandstoredinthe Set Button _ to beginrecordinga macro . transmitteidn themacro . Inourexamplew , efirst AVRremote'smemoryy , ouhavetheopl _ onof wanttheAVR435 to turnon , so thePower I M F _ C F < 0 I erasingit . Youmaydothisatanytimeby following F < E C 0 F < [ I _ M _ ISF < 0 A Button _ shouldbepressed . thesesteps : Figure48 [ - : ELECT KE _ PRES _ : I P 0 IJE R 0 _ I 8 _ / 2 8 1 . PressandholdtheProgramButton _ for 4 . Thenextdisplayscreen ( Figure49 ) iswhereyou Figure52 selectthebuttonthatwillbeusedto recallthe aboutthreesecondswhilethemessageshown macroT . hechoicesarethePowerOn Button 8 . Oncethefirstcommandbuttonforthemacrohas inFigure24appearsintheremote'sLOD InformationDisplay _ . Releasethebutton oroneof thediscreteMacro Buttons _ ) . beenpressedc , ontinueto pressthebuttonsyou whentheredlightundertheSetButton Pressthe • / T NavigationButton _ untilthe wishto bepadof themacro , intheordertheywill beused . Presseachbuttonwithinfivesecondsof appears . nameof thebuttonyouwishto programthe macrointois shown . Forthisexamplewewill thelastbutton , rememberintgo presstheInput 2 . Theremote ' sM6IH MEHUmessage ( Fig . 25 ) , showhowto programa seriesof commandtshat SelectorE ] P whenyouarechangingdevice willappearintheLCDdisplayandtheSet Button functionsA . sthebuttonsontheremoteare willautomaticallbyesentouteverytimethe willremainilluminatedin red . Pressthe • Powerbuttonis pressed . pressedth , eremote'sdisplayscreenwillshowthe NavigationButton _ threetimessothat stepsin themacroastheyareprogrammed M _ CROappearsonthebottomlineoftheLCD ( Figure53 ) . P O _ IE R 0 il A screena , sshownin Figure47 . PresstheSet Figure49 Button _ to enterthemainmacromenu [ _ U R ] P 0 I , ! E r . 0 II branch . 5 . Thenextscreenthatappears ( Figure50 ) is where F _ gur5e3 youselectthedevicefor thefirstcommandthat 3 . At thenextmenuscreen ( Figure54 ) , pressthe willbesentoutas pa _ ol f themacro . Pressthe 9 . Forourexamplew , efirstwanttheAVRPowerOn • / T NavigationButton @ untilthebottom • / T NavigationButton _ untilthenameof buttonpressedf , ollowedbytheTVPowerOn , lineintheremote'sLCDdisplayreadsEF . t _ SE thedeviceappearsontheleftsideof thelower followedbytheCableBoxOn , followedbythe MACRO . PresstheSet Button _ to beginthe linein theLCDdisplayF . orthisexamplet , hefirst selectionof theLogic7 mode # . odothat , press processof erasinga macro . thebuttonsinthiso _ der : buttonwewantto havethemacro " press " is the PowerOnbuttons , o theAVRdeviceisselected . , , PowerOn ERASE _ M _ CRO PresstheSet Button _ whenthedesired * VID2 / TV F _ gu5re4 devicenameappearsto moveto thenextpro * PowerOn _ 1 _ grammingstep .
Page: 48

CONFIGURING THE REMOTE 4 . Thenextdisplayscreen ( Figure55 ) iswhereyou 5 . Assoonas theSetbuttonis pressedt , hefirstbxo SetButton _ to enterthemainpunchthrough selectwhichmacrowillbeerased . Pressthe stepsin themacrowillbeappearin theremote's menubranch . • / T NavigationButton _ untilthenumber LCDscreenY . oumaythenusethe • / T of themacroyouwishto eraseappearsF . or NavigationButton _ to stepupordown I M ¢ 11 ! I ME ! IIJ 1 PLI ! ICH _ THRI ] U _ } H A thisexamplew , ewillerasethe PoweOr nmacro throughthelistof commandsstoredasthe F _ gu5re8 createdintheprevioussectionW . henthename macroA . syoureadthedisplayy , ouwillseeInput of themacroto beerasedappearsp , ressthe SelectorButtons _ appearinbrackets ( , e . g . , 3 . At thenextmenuscreen ( Figure59 ) pressthe SetButton _ . l : _ t . _ l _ ' . : W ] ) . henthestepinthemacrois a func SetButton _ to beginprogrammintghe tion , navigatioonr anyotherbutton , itwillappear remoteforVolumepunchthrough . P 0 I , ! E _ 0 H A nextto thebracketedread - outof theunderlying device ( e . g . , l : _ t _ R : ] POUEROirt ) . I PUHCH - THROUGH 1 _ E0 L I ] M E A Figure55 Figur5e9 6 . Whenyouarefinishedreviewingthemacro's 5 . ThewordEF . . ' _ SEDwillflashfourtimesinthe contentsp , resstheSet Button _ to return bottomlineof theremote'sLCDdisplaya , ndthen 4 . Thenextdisplayscreen ( Figure60 ) is where theremoteto normaloperation . thedisplaywillreturnto itsnormacl ondition . youselectthedevicethatwillreceivethepunch Whenthathappenst , hemacrois erasedandthe throughcommandsI . nourexamplet , hatis the Punch - Through Configuration remoteisreturnedto normaol peration . VID2 _ , / button , asthatis wherewewantthe Punchthroughisa capabiEyof theremotethat AVR435 ' svolumecontrolsto beactive . Press Reada Macro allowstheVolumecontrolsC , hanneUl p / Downbuttons the • / T NavigationButton _ untilthe Tocheckthecommandsshredintheremote'smemory or @ anspe _ keys ( PlayS , top , Record , FastForward nameof thebasedeviceappearsandthen foroneofthebuttonsf , ebw thesesteps : andReversea , ndSkipUp / Downt ) o linkto a different presstheSet Button _ . deviceF . orexamplei , fyour _ cableboxor satellite 1 . PressandholdtheProgramButton _ br receiveris connectedthroughtheAVR435 , youwill aboutthreesecondswhilethemessageshown mostlikelywantto usetheAVR435 ' 8volumecontrol Figur6e0 in Figure24 appearsintheremote'sLOD commandsevenwhentheremotehasbeensetto InformationDisplay _ . Releasethebutton issueallothercommandsforthevideodevice . 5 . At thenextdisplayscreen ( Figure61 ) , youwill whentheredlightundertheSetButton " Punchthrough " enablesyouto easilyprogramthe selectthedevicewhoseVolumeUp / Downand appears . remoteto dothis . Mutecommandws illbeused . Pressthe • / T NavigationButton _ untilthedesireddevice's 2 . Theremote ' sM _ IM MEMUmessage ( Fig . 25 ) , VolumePunch - Through nameappearsto therightofthedeviceinuse . In willappearintheLODdisplayandtheSetButton Followthesestepsb enabletheVolumeUp / Down ourexampleth , atistheAVR435 ( indicatedby willremainilluminateidn red . Pressthe • andMutecontrolsfromonedeviceto beusedwhen # , t . _ RW ) . henthedesiredcombinationof devices NavigationButton _ three8messothat theremoteis olherwiseprogrammefdora different appearsp , resstheSetButton li _ i _ . MACROappearsonthebottomlineof the device . LCDscreena , sshownin Figure47 . Pressthe NOTEFORVOLUMEPUNCH - THROUGTHh : e SetButton _ to enterthemainmacro menubranch . remote'sdefaultsettingsarefor theAVR435 ' s vol F _ gu6re1 umecontrolst , o beusedwhenanyinputordeviceis 3 . At thenextmenuscreen ( Figure56 ) , pressthe 6 . WhentheSetbuttonis pressedt , hedisplaywill selectedw , iththeexceptionof theVID2 _ button . • / T NavigationButton _ untilthebottom changeto showyouthatthenewcombinationof Thereisnoneedto programtheremoteforvolume linein theremote'sLCDdisplayshowsI _ ' . E _ D controcl ommandsis beingsavedto theunit's punchthroughfortheAVR435 ' s controlswithother M _ CRO . PresstheSetButton _ to beginthe memorya , sshowninFigure62 . Theword sourcess , uchas DVDT . ohavetheAVR435 ' s volume processof erasinga macro . S _ b _ EDwillflashfourtimesandthentheremote commandsusedwhentheTVdeviceisselectedt , o1 willreturnto normaol peration . bw thesesteps : I M _ cR ° 1 1 . PressandholdtheProgramButton _ for Figure56 aboutthreesecondswhilethemessageshown F _ gu6re2 4 . Thenextdisplayscreen ( Figure57 ) iswhereyou inFigure24appearsintheremote'sLOD sabotthemacroto beread . Pressthe • / T 7 . Oncethepunch - througihsprogrammedth , e InformationDisplayI _ ] ) . Releasethebutton NavigationButton _ untilthenameof the VolumeUp / DownandMutebuttonsof thesecond whentheredlightundertheSet Button macroyouwishto readappearsF . orthisexample , devicenamedwillbeusedwhenthosebuttons appears . wewillreadbackthePoweOr nmacroc _ eatedin _ ) _ ) arepressedwhilethemasterdevice 2 . Theremote'st . 1 _ IMMEMUmessage ( Fig . 25 ) , a previoussectionW . henthe nameof themacro is inuse . to beerasedappearsp , resstheSetButtonqi _ ) . willappearintheLODdisplayandtheSet Button ReturningtheVolumeControlSettingsto willremainilluminatedinred . Pressthe DefaultOperation RE # ID ¢ 1 M _ CR0 I P 0 I , ! E R 0 H A • / T NavigationButton _ untilPUttCH - Ifyouwishto removetheVolumepunch - 117rousgoh THROUGHappearsonthebottomlineof the Figure57 thatthecommandfsorVolumeandMutearereturned LCDscreena , sshowninFigure58 . Pressthe to thefactorydefaultse _ ng , followthestepsshown
Page: 49

CONFIGURING THE REMOTE transmitthecommandtsora difterentdeviceF . or above , exceptthatinSteps4 and5 , selectthesame theA / T NavigationButton _ untilthe devicefor boththeDEUIOEIN USE ontheleft exam # e , youmaywishto operatethetransporotf a nameof thebasedeviceappeamandthenpress sideof thebottomlineandthePUNCH - THI ; , : OUGH secondVCRconnectedto theVID2 / TVinput , as theSetButton flail . deviceI . ntheexampleused , thedisplayto returnthe showninthefollowingexample , remoteto defaultsettingswillappearasshownin I DHECUI _ CE IN U _ E A I 1 . PressandholdtheProgramB . uttonI _ br Figure63 . Figure65 aboutthreesecondswhilethemessageshown inFigure24appearsintheremote'sLOB I TPUJ < H _ TCHH - THF'OUgH A 1 5 . Atthenextdisplayscreen ( Figure66 ) , youwill InformationDisplayI _ t . Releasethebufton selectthedevicewhoseChanneUl p / Downcorn # _ gurCe3 whenthelightundertheSet Button mandswillbeused . ResstheA / T Navigation turnsred . ChannelPunch - Through Button _ untilthedesireddevicename Channeplunchthroughabxs theChanneUl p / Down appearsto therightof thedevicein use . In 2 . Theremote ' sMAIN MENU message ( Fig . 25 ) , buttonsto sendcommandtso a differe . ndtevicethan ourexamplet , hatis thecablebox . Whenthe willappearintheLCDdisplayandtheSet Button theoneselectedtorothercommandsF . orexample , desiredcombinationof devicesappearsp , ress willremainilluminatedin red . Pressthe youmaywishto usea cableboxorsatellitereceiver theSetButton Ii _ i . A / T NavigationButton _ untilPUNCH - as thesourcefor aVCR , so youwouldwantthe THROUGHappearsonthebottomlineof the ChannelUp / DownButtons _ to transmict orn I PHCURH < C - HCB - LTHROUgH A i LCDscreena , sshowninFigure53 . Pre . stshe mandsto thecableboxeventhoughtheotherbutton SetButton _ to enterthemainpunch4hrough Figure66 commandasreprogrammetdo operatehe VCR menubranch . 6 . WhentheSetbuttonispressedt , hedisplaywill Toprogramthere . motefor channepl unchthrough , 3 . At thenextmenuscreenp , ressthe , , L / T changeb showyouthatthenewcombination followthesestepsT . hisexamplewillshowhowto NavigationButton _ untilTRANSPORT of controlcommandsisbeingsavedto theunit's programchannepl unchthroughsothatthecom - appearsonthebottomlineof theLCDscreena , s memorya , sshownin Figure67 . Thewold mandspre . grammefdorChanneUl p / Downforthe SAUED willflashfourtimesandthentheremote shownin Figure69 . PresstheSet Button VID3 / Cabledevicewillbetransmittedwhenthe to beginprogrammintgheremotefor transport willreturnto normaloperation . VID1NCRdevicehasbeenselectedasthe punch4hrough . currentdevice . I " ' : : r ' < _ c ' : H : B _ L ' _ s _ . , : D _ " 1 j F , uM , : : H - r H _ , _ u _ r _ H j TR _ HSPORT 1 . PressandholdtheProgramButton _ for F _ gur6e7 aboutthreesecondswhilethemessageshown Figur6eg 7 . Oncethepunchthroughis programmedth , e inFigure24 appearsintheremote'sLOD 4 . Thenextdisplayscreen ( Figure70 ) selectsthe ChannelUp / DownButtonsof thesecond InformationDisplayO . Releasethebutton devicenamedwillbeusedwhenthosebuttons devicethatwillreceivethepunchthroughcorn whentheredlightundertheSet Button mandsi , nourexampleth , atistheTVbutton , as _ FFFaFreFpFrFesFsFe ] _ dwhilethemasterdeviceis appears . inuse , thatiswherewewanttheVCR'stransporct ontrols 2 . Theremote ' sMAIN MENUmessage ( Fig . 25 ) , to beac _ veP . resstheA / T NavigationButton Returningthe ChannelControlSettingsto willappearintheLCDdisplayandtheSetButton untilthenameof thebasedeviceappears DefaultOperation willremainilluminatedinred . Pressthe andthenpresstheSet ButtonIi _ i . If youwishto removetheChannePl unch - Through A / T NavigationButton _ untilPUNCH - sothatthecommandfsor ChanneUl p / Downare , I DEUICE I ! l JBE 1 THROUGHappearsonthebottomlineof the T U A returnedto thefactorydefaultsettingf , ollowthesteps LCDscreena , sshowninFigure58 . Pressthe FLqur7e0 shownabove , exceptthatinSteps4 and5 , select Set Button _ to enterthemainpunch - through thesamedevicetotboththeDEUICE IM USEon menubranch . 5 . At thenextdisplayscreen ( Figure71 ) , selectthe theleftsideof thebottomlineandthe PUNCH - devicewhosel _ anspoc _ ot mmandws illbeused , 3 . At thenextmenuscreenp , ressthe , , L / T THROUGHdevicei , ntheexampleused , thedisplay PresstheA / T NavigationButton _ untilthe NavigationButton _ untilCHANNEL to returntheremoteto defaultsettingswillappearas desireddevicenameappearsto therightof the appearsonthebottomlineof theLCDscreen , showninFigure68 . devicein use . Inourexamplet , hatis theVCR . asshowninFigure64 . PresstheSetButton Whenthedesiredcombinatioonf devices to beginprogrammintgheremotetor I FH ' uI ] : " F ' ! : < : H - H - rC HR r _ ' : u ' _ H , A 1 appearsp , resstheSetButton Ii _ i . Channepl unchthrough . F _ guCre8 I PUHCH - THROUgH 1 / H < _ HCR [ F'UHCH - THr - , our _ H 1 C H B H N E L A TransportPunch - Through F _ gur7e1 ThePlayl _ Fr _ S . , topI _ ) , FastForward / Reverse Figure64 I ( I _ , PauseI _ ) , Record _ andSkip Up / Down 6 . WhentheSetbuttonis pressedt , hedisplaywill 4 . Thenextdisplayscreen ( Figure65 ) iswhereyou TranspoCrtontrolsaresetatthefactoryto oper changeto showyouthatthenewcombinatioonf selectthedevicethatwillreceivethepunch ateyourDVDplaye _ o , rthecontrolsof a specific controcl ommandsis beingsavedto theunit's throughcommandIsn , ourexampleth , atisthe devicesuchasaVCRorCDplayerwhentheyare memorya , sshowninFigure72 . Theword VID2 / TVbuttona , sthatis wherew , ewantthe selectedH . oweveLbyusingtheTransporPtunch SAUEDwillflashfourl _ mesandthentheremote cablebox'schanneclontre . ltso beactive . Press Throughfeatureyoumayprogramthesecontrolsto willreturnto normaloperation .
Page: 50

CONFIGURING THE REMOTE 3 . Atthenextmenuscreenpressthe A / T to thenextpositionT . henpresstheNumeric NavigationButton _ untilREMRME Key _ asrequiredto enterthedesiredletter . j TH < UCR [ TR ! B ] j S _ UED A DEL . IICaEppearsonthebottomlineof the F _ guF7e2 LCDscreena , s showninFigure75 . Pressthe c . Toenbra blankspace , pressthe • Navigation Set Button _ to beginrenaminga device . Button @ twice . Thefimtpresswillmovethe 7 . Oncethepunchthroughis programmedth , e cursorto theright , andthesecondpresswill transporbtuttonsoftheseconddevicenamed movethecursoronemorespaceto theright , willbeusedwhenthosebuttonsare pressad FR < EEi ! II _ _ MEM E [ IL - _ EICE A I whilethemasterdeviceis inuse . leavinga blankspacebetweenthelastletter Figure75 andthenextone . Returningthe TransportControlSettingsto 4 . Thenextdisplayscreen ( Figure76 ) iswhereyou DefaultOperation selectthedevicethatwillberenamedi , nour 8 . RepeaSt tep7 asneededb enteralltheneeded Ifyouwishto removethe _ ansportPunchThroughso examplet , hatis theTVbutton . PresstheA / T lettersn , umbersc , hafacbrsandspaces . thatthetransporct ommandasrereturnedto thefac NavigationButton @ untilthenameof the 9 , Whenthetextentryiscompletep , ressthe torydefaultsettingf , ollowthestepsshownabove , basedeviceappearsandthenpresstheSet SetButtonqi _ . TheLCDdisplaywillblink exceptthatinSteps4 and5 , selectthesamedevice Buttonqi _ l _ . DEL . _ ICEREtlRMEDthreetimesandthen forboththeDEUICE Iirt USEontheleftsideof the relurnto normaloperallon . bottomlineandthePUtlCH - THROUC - ; HdeviceI . n FT - _ ¢ ! E ! IA M E DE _ IICE A I theexampleused , thedisplayto returntheremoteto Figur7eS Oncea deviceis renamedyouwillseethenewname defaultsettingswillappearasshownin Figure73 . onthetoplineof theremote'sLCDdisplaywhenever 5 . Atthenextmenuscreenyouwillseethedevice theInput / / DeviceSelector _ is pressedo , r when I F'UHi ] : H - THTF ' , iZ'UGHTU < . [ nameonthebottomlineofthedisplaywitha anyothercommanWfunctiobnuttonontheremoteis blinkingcursorboxto therightof thedevice Figure73 pressedafterthemainDeviceSelectoris pressed . nameP . ressthe • NavigationButton @ to Notethatrenaminga deviceinthe remotewillnot returntheblinkingcursorto thefarleftsideof the Renaming changethenameof theinputusedbytheonscreen displayline . Youmaythenretitlethedevicename menusystemof theA \ / R435 . Whilethenamesgivento thebuttonsandinputson asshowninthenextstep . theremoterepresenrtecognizablceategorieosf NOTESONRENAMINGDEVICES : audio / videoproductss , ystemoperationmaybeeasier 6 . Toenterthenewnamep , resstheNumeric Keys • Tomovethecursorto therightor leftof thedisplay ifthedisplaysshownintheremote'sLCDscreenare _ , Thelettemabovethenumberedbuttons duringtherenamingprocessp , ressthe • / • customizetdo reflectthespecificcharacteristicosfa indicatewhichlelterorsymbowl illappearwhen NavigationButtons _ as required . playbacksource'sbrandnameorthenewfunction thebuttonis pressedduringtherenaming givento a specificbuttonwhenoneremote'scontrols processT . hefirst pressofthebuttonwillenterthe • Thetablebelowshowsthefattersn , umbersand areprogrammedintotheAVRremoteT . heAVR firstleffershowns , ubsequenptressesof thesame charactertshatmaybeaccessedbypressingthe remoteallowsyouto changethenameof eithera buttonwillchangethedisplayto theotherletters NumericKeys : masterdeviceoranybuttonontheremoteusingthe abovethatnumberedkey . Forexamples , incethe Key Characters Key Characters followingsteps . firstlefterweneedto renametheinputto HDTV 1 [ , ] , / , 1 6 M , N , O , 6 Tuneris an " H " , youwouldlocatethe " H " above 2 A B , O , 2 7 RO , R , S , 7 Renaminga Device the " 4 " bufton , andpressthebuttontwice . The 3 D , E , R3 S T , U , V , S Torenamea specificdevice / inpustourcebutton , foF firstpressshowsa " G , " thesecondpresschanges 4 G , H , I , 4 9 W , X , Y , Z , 9 lowthesestepsF . orthisexamplew , ewillshowyou itto an " HI'Consultthetableat theendof this 5 J , K , L , 5 0 , . , # , 0 howto renametheDevice / inpuStelectornormally sectionto seewhichcharacterpsressinga partic shownas " TV " to " HDTVTUNER . " • Renaminag devicechangesthenameof thedevice ularbuttongenerates . only , notanyof theindividuakleyfunctionswithin 1 . PressandholdtheProgramButton _ for 7 . Afteryouenterthefirstletterof thenewdevice thatdevicememoryT . ochangethenameof an aboutthreesecondswhilethemessageshown namet , herearethreeoptionsforenteringthenext individuadlevicef , ollowtheinstructionisnthenext in Figure24 appearsintheremote'sLCD character : section . InformationDisplay _ . Releasethebutton whentheredlightundertheSetButton a . Toentera lelterthatrequiresa different RenamingIndividualKeys appears . numerickeyto bepresseds , implypressthat Thanksb theprogramminfglexibilitoyf theAVR buttonT . hecursorwillautomaticallmyoveto remotea , nindividuabluttonontheremotemaybe 2 . Theremote'sM _ IM MEMU message ( Figure25 ) , thenextpositionandthefirstletteraccessed assigneda teatureorfuncSonthatis differenQt omthe willappearintheLCDdisplayandtheSetButton bythenewbuttonwillappearF : ollowingour namethatappearsas thefactorydefaultwhenthe willremainilluminateidn red . Pressthe examplet , henextletterneededis a " D , " so buttonis pressedH . oweverw , iththeRenameKey A / T NavigationButton _ untilREtIRME youwouldpressthe " 3 " buttononce . functionit is possibleto renamealmostanybuttonon appearsonthebottomlineof theLCDscreen , theremoteso thatwhenthebuttonispressedyouwill asshowninFigure74 . b . Toentera letterthatusesthesamenumeric seea moredescriptiveorappropriatneamedisplayed . key , youmustfiratpressthe • Navigation I MAIl1 ME _ iU I F - g ! ! I _ M L - ia Torenamea specificbuttonontheremote , follow Button @ to movetheblinkingcursorblock Figure74 thesestepsF . orthisexamplew , ewillshowyouhowto
Page: 51

CONFIGURING THE REMOTE 9 . RepeaSt teps7 and8 asneededto complete renametheDSPSurroundModeSelectorO , whichis normallynotusedwhenDVDisselected , enteringtheneededfattersn , umbersc , haracters I _ ' _ c z : _ ' _ F ' 1 sothatitreadsZOOMintheremote'sdisplay . andspaces . Figur8e0 1 . PressandholdtheProgramButton _ for b . Ifthebuttonto berenameddoesnothavea 10 . Whenthetextentryis completep , resstheSet aboutthreesecondswhilethemessageshown Button qi _ . Thenewnamewillbeenteredinb functioninthedeviceselectedt , hetoplineof inFigure24 appearsintheremote'sLOD theremete'smemoryr , eplacingthedefaultname . theLCDscreenwillbeblanka , nda blinking InformationDisplayO . Releasethebutton blockcursorwillappearonthefarleftside 11 . Atthispointyouhavetwooptions : whentheredlightundertheSet Button ofthebottomlineof thedisplaya , sshownin a . If youwishto programanadditionakleywithin appears . Figure81 . thesamedevicep , resstheSetButton _ as 2 . Theremote'sM _ IM MEtlU message ( Figure25 ) , instructedbythebottomlineofthe LCDdisplay I , 1 willappearintheLCDdisplayandtheSetButton reading _ irtOTHER KEY , Theremotewill willremainilluminatedinred . Pressthe Figur8e1 returnto theSELECT 6 KEY menuoplon A / T NavigationButton _ untilREirt , _ ME asshowninStep6 . Repeattheinstrucllonisn 7 . Toenterthenewnamefor thekey , pressthe appearsonthebottomlineof theLCDscreen , Steps6 though11to renamethenextkey . NumericKeys _ . Thelettemabovethe asshowninFigure7 , 4 , numberedbuttonsindicatewhichlettersorsym - b . If youhavenoadditionakleysto renamep , ress 3 , At thenextmenuscreenpressthe A / T bolswillappearwhenthebuttonis pressedduring the • NavigationButton _ oncesothat NavigationButton _ untilREtI _ I " IE KEY therenamingprocessT . hefirstpressof thebut - themenuscreendisplaysE _ : ITonthebottom appearsonthebottomlineof theLCDscreena , s tonwillenterthefirstcharactesrhowns , ubsa lineof thedisplayP . resstheSetButton showninFigure77 , PresstheSetButton quentpresseswillchangethedisplayto theother to _ etumtheremoteto normaol peration . to continue . lettersabovethatnumberedkey , Forexample , NOTESONRENAMINGKEYS : sincethefirstletterweneedto renametheTone FR < EEN ! IA _ MMEE KE _ A 1 buttonto Zoomisa " Z , " soyouwouldlocatethe • Renaminag keydoesnotchangeitsfunctionY . ou " Z " abovethe " 9 " button , andpressthebutton maychangethefsncSonofanindividuakleyby F _ gur7e7 fourtimesT . hefirstpressshowsa " W , " thesubse - learninga newcodeintotheremote . Seepage44 4 . Thenextdisplayscreen ( Figure78 ) selectsthe for moreinformation . quentpressesstepthroughtheotherlettersavail - devicewithinwhichthekeyto berenamedexists . ableuntilthe " Z " appearsC . onsultthetableon • Whena keyis renameditwillonlyapplyto the Pressthe A / T NavigationButtons _ until page50to seewhichcharacterasreavailabbby specificdevicesalectedin Step4 . Thesamekey thenameofthebasedeviceappearsI . nour pressinga particulabr utton . mayberenamedasneededfor eachindividual examples , incewewantto renamea bultonwithin devicewithwhichit is used . 8 . Afteryouenterthefirstletterof thenewdevice theDVDdevicememoryD , b _ Dshouldappearin namet , herearethreeoptionsforenteringthe thelowerlineof theLCDW . henthedesired nextcharacter : Resetting the Remote devicenameappearsp , resstheSetButtonqi _ , Dependinognthewayinwhichtheremotehasbeer ] a . Toentera letterthatrequiresa differennt umeric I zD : c ' : uh _ cccT ' : D _ , s " 1 programmedth , eremaybea silsationwhereyouwish keyto bepresseds , implypressthatbutton . to totallyeraseallchangesthathavebeenmadeto Figure78 Thecursorwillautomaticallmyoveto the next theremoteand _ etumit to thefactorydefaultsY . ou positionandthefirstblteraccessedbythenew 5 . At thenextmenuscreens , electthefirstbutton maydethatbytollowingthestepsshownbelow , but buttonwillappealFollowingourexamplet , he withinthedeviceb berenameda , s instructedin remembetrhatoncetheremoteis reset , ALLchanges nextletterneededis an " 0 , " so youwouldpress thedisplayshowninFigure79 . Selectthebutton thathavebeenmade , includingprogramminfgor use the " 6 " bultononce . bysimplypressingitontheremote . withotherdevicesl , earnedkeys , macrosp , unch b . Toentera letterthatusesthesamenumeric throughsettingsandkeynamesw , illbeerasedand key , youmustfiratpressthe • Navigation anysettingsyouhadpreviouslmy adewillhaveto be reentered . Button _ to movetheblinkingcursorblock Figure79 to thenextpositionT . henpresstheNumeric Toeraseallsattingsandresettheremoteb the 6 . Dependingonwhetheror notthebuttonpressed Key _ asrequiredto enterthedesiredletter . odginaflactorydefaultse _ ngsanddisplaysf , ollow alreadyhasa namedfunctionwithinthedevice Thisis thewayyouwouldenterthesecond " 0 " thesesteps : selectedo , neof lwothingswillhappen . inthewordZOOM , andagainfortheletter " MI ' 1 . PressandholdtheProgramButton _ br a . If thebuttonto berenamedalreadyhasa pre c . Toentera blankspacep , ressthe • Navigation aboutthreesecondswhilethemessageshown programmedo , rpreviousJryenamedtitleinthe Button _ twiceT . heflintpresswillmovethe inFigure24appearsintheremote'sLOD remote'smemoryy , ouwillseethatnameon cursorto theright , andthesecondpresswill InformationDisplay0 , Releasathebutton thetoplineof theLCDdisplaya , nda blinking movethecursoronemorespaceto theright , whentheredlightundertheSetButton blockcursorwillappearonthefarleftsideof leavinga blankspacebelweenthelastletter appears . thebottomlineof thedisplaya , sshownin andthenextone . Figure80 . 2 . Theremote ' sM _ IM MEi ' _ Umessag ( eFig , 25 ) , will appeairntheLCDdisplayandtheSetButton
Page: 52

CONFIGURING THE REMOTE willremainilluminatedinred . Pressthe lit ina darkroomforanextendedperiodof timeY . ou 2 . Theremote'sII A I N 11ENU message ( Fig . 25 ) NavigationButton _ untilUSER RESET may " rechargei " tby placingtheremoteinnormal willappearintheLCDdisplayandtheSet Button appearsonthebottomlineof theLCDscreena , s roomlightingfor a fewhours . willremainilluminatedinred . Pressthei , / T showninFigure82 . NavigationButtons _ unSlDEV I C E OncetheLight Button _ is pressedt , heremote's P RI 0 R I T Y appearsintheboftomlineof the backlightinwgillremainonbr approximate7lysec I Mt _ IIl MEIIU I USER RESET A LCDscreena , sshowninFigure86 , andpressthe onds , andwhenyoupressanybuttonontheremote SetButtonqi _ lL F _ gur8e2 whilethebacklightingison , thelightwillstayonfor another7 secondsH . owevert , heremote's " Couch " 3 . PresstheSet Button _ to resettheremote . MAIIi MEHIJ 1 DEHICB PRIORIT _ i functionwillconservebafterypowerbyturningboth NotethatoncetheSetButtonis pressedthe thebacklightinagndtheLCDdisplayoffwhenany F _ gur8e6 processmaynotbestoppedW . hilethemmote's buttonis pressedfor morethan30 seconds . memoryis beingcleareda , RESETTItlG . . . 3 . WhentheDEVICE PRIORITY message messagewillappearintheupperlineof the Youmayalsoconfiguretheremoteso thattheback appeaminthemmote'sLODdisplay ( Figure87 ) , remote'sLCDscreenas shownin Figure83 . lightingwillcomeon , anytimea buttonis pressed . pressthei / T NavigationButtons _ to It maytakea fewminutesfor theresetprocess Tosetthisoption , fobw thesesteps : selecttheoptionthatbestsuitsyourneeds . to takepJacea , ndthelengthof timewillvary dependingonhowmuchcustomizabnandpm 1 . PressandholdtheProgramButton _ for gramminghastakenplaceP . leasebepabnt ; as BEHIIZ : E PRIORIT9 1 about3 secondswhilethemessageshownin HORMAL i longasthemessageappearsinthedisplaythe Figure24appearsintheremote'sLCDdisplay . Figure87 remoteisfunctioningproperly . Releasethebuftonwhentheredlightunderthe • WhenN 0 R MA L appearsonthebottomlineof SetButton _ appears . I R , : _ € rTI _ 1 theLODt , heAVRremotewillreverttoAVRcontrol 2 . Whentheremote ' sMainMenumessage ( Fig . 25 ) 5 secondsafterthelastbuftonpress , whenyou Figure83 appearsintheLCDdisplayandtheSetButton arecontrollinag sourcedevice . remainsilluminatedin red , pressthei / T 4 . Whentheremotehasbeentotallyresetand NavigationButton _ untilB AC K L I GH t • WhenE XT EN DE D appeamonthebottom returnedto thefactorydefaultconditiona , lineof theLODt , heAVRremotewillrevertto AVR appearsinthebottomlineoftheLCDscreena , s REMOTERESET COMPLETEmessagewill showninFigure88 . control12 secondsafterthelastbuttonpressw , hen appear ( Figure84 ) brieflya , ndthentheremote youarecontrollinag sourcedevice . willreturnto normaloperation . MAIfl MBHU BACK LIGHT i • WhenL AS T US ED appeamonthebottom IZBMPLL - TE I F ! EMBTE F'ET : ET I lineof theLODo , nceyoupressoneof theInput F _ gu8re8 Figure84 SelectorsO , theAVRremotewillcontinueto 3 . PresstheSet Button _ andthenpressthe operateaswiththecodesfortheselectedsource Device Priority Timing lilt NavigationButtons _ againsothat deviceu , ntilanotherdeviceis selectedI . f you 0 N F UL L appearsinthebottomlineof the choose11 % option , pleaseremembetrhatyouwill Theremote'sDevicePrioritymodeallowsyouto LCDdisplaya , sshowninFigure89 . haveto presstheAVRSelector _ in o _ detro selectthelengthof timethattheremotecontinuesto usetheremoteto operatetheA \ / Rfor functions issuecodesfora deviceotherthantheAVRonceyou BACK LIGHT suchassurroundmodeselectionb , uttheVolume usetheremoteto controal sourceor otherproduct . OH FULL A andMutecontrolswillcontinueto remainactivein Thedefaultoperallonfortheremoteisto haveall Figur8e9 theirAVRmodesat alltimes . buttonsontheremote _ eturnto theirAVRfunctions 5 secondsafterthelastbuftonpress . Howevmy , ou 4 . PresstheSet Button _ onemoretimeT . he 4 . PresstheSetButton _ onemoretime . The mayprogramtheAVRremoteto remainactiveasthe LCDdisplaywillshowthewo _ dS _ k ; IMGonthe LCDdisplaywillshowthewordSRLEME ; onthe sourcedeviceremotetor 12secondso , rto keepthe toplineforabout2 secondsandthenflash toplineforabout2 secondsandthenflash SA VE D fourtimesonthebottomlineto indicate sourcedevice'scodesactiveuntilanotherInput SRtSEDfourtimesonthebottomlineto indicate thatthesettinghasbeenacceptedbytheremote's SelectorO is pressedI . fyouwishto keepthe thatthesettinghasbeenacceptedbytheremote's defaultsettingof a 5 second _ eturnn , ochanges memory . memory . areneeded . 5 . Theremob'sbacklightlnwgillnowturnonwhenever Backlight Options a buttonis pressedT . orevertto theoriginasl etting , Tochangethe deviceprioritytiming , follow followthefourstepsshownabove , butinStep3 , thesesteps : TheAVR435 ' s remotehasa built - inbacklighst ystem thatmakesit easietro usetheremotewhenthemorn selecttheoptionthathasthewold N0 RMAL on 1 . PressandholdtheProgramButton _ for thebottomlineof theLCDdisplay . lightingis dimmedforanopllmalhometheaterexperi about3 secondswhilethemessageshownin ence . Toturnthebacklightinogn , simplypressthe AdditionalNoteson Configuringand Operating Figure24 appearsintheremote'sLOD Light Button _ . Thatbuttonismadefromaspe the Remote InformationDisplayO . Releasethebufton cial " glow " materiatlhatmakesiteasierto findindark whentheredlightundertheSet Button • Whentheremoteis beingprogrammedit , willauto roomsT . hisglowfeaturedoesnotuseanybaftery appears . mallcallytimeoutif nobuttonis pressedwithina power , sotheglowwillfadewhentheremoteiskept
Page: 53

CONFIGURING THE REMOTE 30 - sacondperiod . Themessageshownin Figure 90wil ] appearbrieflya , ndtheremotewillthenexit thefeaturebeingprogrammeadndanydataentered willbelost . I TCILMRE _ EOUST PORFE - ! SSED I Figur9e0 • Theprogramminogrconfiguratiopnrocessmay alsobestoppedat anytimeby pressingtheClear Buttonql ] _ , Themessageshownin Figure90 willappeart , hedataenteredinthecurrentprocess willbelostandtheremotewillreturnto normal operationA . nyprocessthatwasunderwawyhen thebultonwillbepressedmustberestarted . • Extensivueseof theprogrammingle , arningand configuratiofnunctionsof theremotem , ayconsume significantlmy orebafterypowerthannormarlemote operationW . hilethebatteriesshouldlastforfourto sixmonthsin normaol perationy , oumayfindthat theyneedto bechangedsooneraftertheremoteis programmefdor thefirsttime . • Whenthebatteriesapproacha levelbelowwhich theremotewillnotfunctiont , heremote'sLOD screenwilldisplaya LO _ BATTER . 9warning , as shownin Figure91 . Westronglyrecommend replacingthebatteriesassoonasthismessage appearsto avoidthelossof programminagndcon figurationsettingsT . heseseftingsarenotlostwhen thebatteriesarechangedquickly . LOkl EA [ ! ' ERS Figur9e1
Page: 54

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE SYMPTOM CAUSE SOLUTION UnitdoesnotfunctionwhenMain • NoACPower • MakecertainACpowercordis pluggedinto PowerSwitchis pushed a liveouflet • Checkto seewhetheroutletis switchcontrolled Displaylights , butnosound • Intermittenint putconnections • Makecertainthatallinputandspeakerconnections orpicture aresecure • Mute ison • PressMute Button • Volumecont + oils down • Turnupvolumecontrol Unitturnson , butfrontpanel • Displaybrightnessisturnedoff • FollowtheinstructionisntheDisplayBrightnesssection displaydoesnotlightup onpage38 or 39 sothatthedisplayis setto V F ] ) F UL L Nosoundfromanyspeaker ; • Amplifieirs inprotectionmode • Checkspeakerwireconnectionfsorshortsat receivearnd lightaroundpowerswitchis red dueto possibleshort speakerends • Amplifieirs inprotectionmode • Contacyt ourlocalHarmanKardonservicecenter dueto internapl roblems Nosoundfromsurroundor • Incon - ecsturroundmode • Selecta modeotherthanStereo centerspeaker - s • Inputis monaural • Thereis nosun - oundinformatiofnrommonosources • Incorrecctonfiguration • Checkspeakermodeconflgulation • Stereoor Monoprogrammaterial • Thesurrounddecodermaynotcreatecenter - orreanchannel informatio % n m nonencodedprograms Unitdoesnotrespondto • Weakbatteriesinremote • Changeremotebatteries remotecommands • Wrongdeviceselected • PresstheAVRselector • Remotesensoris obscured • Makecertainfront - paneslensorisvisibleto remote orconnectremotesensor Intermittenbtuzzingintuner • Localintederence • Moveunitor antennaawayfloracomputersfl , uorescent lights , motor - osrotherelectricaalppliances Lettersflashin thechanneilndicator • Digitaal udiofeedpaused • ResumeplaytorDVD displayanddigitaal udiostops • CheckthatDigitalInputis selected Fandoesnotappearto operate • Additionacloolingmaynotberequired • Thefanisactivatedonlywhenadditionacloolingis requireddueto highinternatlemperatureit , is normaflor thefanto beinactiveat normalvolumelevels . inadditionto theitemsshownabovea , dditionailntormatioonntroubleshootinpgossibleproblemswithyourAVR435 , or installatiornelatedissuesm , aybefoundinthelistof " FrequentlAyskedQuestionsw " hichis locatedintheProducSt upportsectionof ourWebsiteat www . harmankardon . com . Processor Reset speakerconfiguratiodnata , firstputtheunitinStandby returnedto thefacton / presetsa , ndallseltingsfor theseitemsmustbereentered . by pressingtheStandby / OnSwitch il . Next , press intherarecasewheretheunit'soperaSoonrthedis andholdtheSurroundModeGroupSelector [ ] playsseemabnormalt , hecausemayinvolvetheerratic andtheTuningModeSelector [ ] buttonsforthree Ifthesystemis stilloperallngincorrecflyth , eremay operaSoonf tnesystem'smemoryormicroprocessor . seconds . havebeenanelectronicdischargeor severnACline interterenctehathascorruptedthememoryor Tocorrectthisproblemf , irstunplugtheunitfromthe Theunitwillturnonautomaticallaynddisplaythe microprocessor . ACwalloutletandwaitat least3 minutesA . fterthe RE SE 1 " messageintheUpperDisplayLine [ ] , pauser , econnecttheACpowercordandcheckthe Ifthesestepsdo notsolvetheproblem , consulat n unit'soperationI . f thesystemstillmalfunctionsa , autnorizedHarmanKardonservicecenter . NOTE : Resettingtheprocessowr illeraseanyconfigu - systemresetmaydeartheproblem . rationsettingsyouhavemadeforspeakerso , utput levelss , urroundmodesd , igitailnputassignmentass TocleartheAVR435 ' s enllresystemmemoryinclud - wellas thetunerpresetsA . ftera resettheunitwillbe ingtunerpresetso , utputlevelseftingsd , elaytimesand
Page: 55

AVR 435 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Audio Section AMTunerSection StereoMode FrequencRyange 520 - 1720 kHz ContinuouAsveragePower ( FIG ) Signal - to - NoisReatio 45dB UsableSensitNity Loop500pV 80 Wattsperchannel2 , 0Hz - 2OkHz , Distortion 1kHz , 50 % Mod0,8 % @ < 0.07 % THD , bothchanneldsriveninto8 ohms Selectivib / _ + lOkHz3 , 0dB SevenChanneSl urroundModes PowerperIndividuaClhannel VideoSection FrontL & Rchannels : TelevisioFnormat NTSO 65 S ! attsperchannel InputLevel / Impedance 1Vpp / 75 ohms @ < 0.07 % THD , 20Hz - 2OkHzinto8 ohms OutputLevel / Impedance 1Vpp / 75 ohms Centerchannel : VideoFrequencRyesponse ( CompositaendS Video ) 10Hz - 8MHz ( - 3dB ) 65 Watts @ < 0.07 % THD , 20Hz - 2OkHzintoS ohms VideoFrequencRyesponse Surround ( L & RSide , L & R back ) channels : ( ComponenVtideo ) IOHz - 5OMHz ( - 3riB ) 65 Wattsperchannel General @ < 0.07 % THD , 20Hz - 2OkHzinto8 ohms AC120V / 6OHz PowerRequirement InputSensitNity / Impedance PoweCr onsumption 59S / at PowerOn , idle ; 1,000S ! at ratedpoweroutput Linear ( HighLevel ) 200mW47kohms ( 7channelsdriven ) Signatlo NoiseRallodHFA ) 100dB Dimensions Product Shipping SurroundSystemAdjacentChanneSl eparation Width 17,3 inches ( 440mm ) 20,1 inches ( 510mm ) ProLogicVII 40dB Height 6,5 inches ( 165mm ) 10inches ( 254mm ) Depth 17,1 inches ( 435mm ) 22,2 inches ( 565mm ) DolbyDigita ( lAC3 ) 55dB Weight 39 Ib ( 1S . 6kg ) 45 Ib ( 21.4kg ) DTS 55dB FrequencRyesponse @ 1W ( + OdB , 3dB ) lOHz 130kHz Depthmeasuremenintcludesknobs , buttonsandterminalconnections HighInstantaneous Heightmeasuremenintcludesfeetandchassis . Cun - enCt apabilit ( yHC © + 40 Amps All taaturesandspecificationasresubjectto changewithoutnotice TransienItntermedulation HarmanKardon . Powerforthe DigitalRevolutioanndLogic7 areregisteredtrademarksof Distortion _ lM ) Unmeasurable HarmanInternationaInl dustriesIn , corporated SlewRate 40W _ sec Itlm _ et , ' EQ " isa t / ademarkof HarmanInternationaInl dustriesIn , corporated FMTunerSection * Manufactureudnderlicensetrom DolbyLaboratorie " sDolby , " " ProLogic " andthe DoubleDsymbolaretrademarksof DolbyLaboratories FrequencRyange 87.5 - 108 . OMHz UsableSensiSvib / UHF1 , 3pV / 13.2dBf DTS , DTSSurroundD , TSESDTS96 / 24 andDTSNeo : 6areregisteredtrademarksof Signalto NoiseRallo Mono / Stereo70 / 6SdB DigitaTl heaterSystemsI , nc Distortion Mono / Stereo0 . 2 / 0.3 % A BUSandA - BUSReadyate registeredtrademarkosf LeisureTechElectronicsPryLtdAustralia StereoSeparallon 40dB @ 1kHz Selectivity + 400kHz , 70dB SACDisa trademarkof SonyElectronicIsnc ImageRejection SOdB TiVoisa registeredtrademarkofTiVo , Inc IFRejection 90dB ReplayTVisa registeredtrademarkof DigitalNetworksNorthAmericaInc SuppliedAccessories ThefollowingaccessoryitemsaresuppliedwiththeAVR435 . Ifanyof theseitemsaremissingp , leasecontactHarmanKa _ doncustomesrerviceatwww . harmankaldon . com . , , A systemremotecontrol , , AnAMloopantenna , , A ZoneIIremotecontrol , , An FMwireantenna , , An lll _ et ; EQ _ microphone , , SixAAAbatteries , , Extendemr dformicrophone
Page: 56

INDEX 5 - ChanneSl tereo 23,34 ManuaSl ystemSetup 26 - 31 SpeakerSelection19 MasterMenu 20 6 Channel / 8 - OhannDeirlectInput 10 , 32 SpeakerSetup26 - 28 7 ChanneSl tereo 23,34 MemoryBackup38 SpeakerSetupMenu 26 , 28 ABUS 9,15,17,41 42 MP3 36.37 SpeakeTr erminals9 , 16 MuRiroom ACPowerOonnections9 , 18 SpeakeWr ire16 AdvancedFeatures39 40 MultiroomSetup 41 SpeakedChannienlputIndicators6 , 36 AdvancedSelectMenu39 MultiroomInstalhtion17 18 Subwoofer9 , 16 , 19 27 28 AntennaTerminab9 , 16 MultiroomOperation15 , 42 SurroundBackAmplifiers17 , 27,41 SurroundModeChart34 AudioEquipmenCt onnections8 - 1 O , 16 Mute 6 , 14,32 AudioSetup21 22 NightMode 23 , 36 SurroundModeSelection5 , 12,14 , 22 - 23 , 33 - 36 AudioSetupMenu 21 OnScreenDisplay20 , 39 40 AutoModeTuning6 , 12 , 13,37 Operation32 - 38 SurroundOff 23 , 34 SurroundSelectMenu22 AutoPolling16 , 21 , 40 OpticaDl igitaAl udioJacks 7 10,16,17,20,21,35 AutoScanTuning37 OutputLevelAdJustment2s9 31 SurroundSetup22 - 23 AN SyncDelay29 OutputLevelTrimAdjustment38 S Video 9 , 16 - 17 PCM 36 CD 10 , 16 SystemConfiguration19 31 ChanneAl djustMenu30 , 3S PowerSwitches5 , 7 , 12 , 15,20 , 32 SystemSetup19 20 CleaningandMaintenance4 PresetStations6 , 13 , 37 Tape 10,16 , 37 38 ProcessoRr eset54 CoaxiaDl igitaAl udioJacks 7 , 10,16,17,20,21,35 TechnicaSlpecifications55 RS232 Port 17 18 ComponenVtideo 9 , 17,21 TheaterMode 23 , 34 ReapPaneClonnectionsS 10 CompositVeideo 9 ToneControls7 , 13 , 21,32 DelayAdjustMenu 29 RecallingPresetStations6 , 13 , 37 TrademarAkcknowledgemen5ts5 DelaySet , rigs 2 _ 29 Recording37 38 TransporCt ontrols13 , 49 DescriptioanndFeatures3 RemoteConl _ ol TroubleshootinGguide 54 DigitaAl udioPlayback33 - 37 Backlight52 TunerMode 6 , 12,37 Batteries20 DigitaSl ourceSelection21 , 35 TunerOperation37 TurmOnVolumeLevel39 DimmingFrontPaneDl isplay12 , 38 , 39 ChangingDevices46 TV17 DisplayBrightness12 , 38 , 39 ChannePl unchThrough49 DolbyDigital20 , 22,33 , 3 _ 35 DevicePrior @ 52 TypographicCalonvenllons2 DolbyHeadphone33 , 34 Functions11 - 15 Unpacking4 DolbyProLogic 22 , 33,34 LearningCodes44 46 Upsampli % 21 22 Macros46 48 DolbyVirtualSpeaker22 , 34 VCR 9 - 1 O , 16 - 17 DSPSurroundModes23 , 34 VideoConnections7 , % 1 O , 16 - 17 Main 11 14,20,43 53 DTSModes23 , 34 ProgramminPgroducCt odes43 - 44 VideoDbplayInput 13 DVD 9,10,16,17,33 PunchThroughProgramming4 _ 50 VideoMonitor 9 , 17 EzSeVFQ3 , 2 _ 26 ReassigninIgnputSelectorDeviceType 46 VolumeControl6 , 12,32 , 48 RontPaneCl ontrols5 7 RenaminDg eqces50 FrontPaneDl oor 5 7 RenaminKgeys 50 51 F _ onPt aneJl acks 7 , 17 Resetting51 52 FrontPaneDl isplayFade39 TransporCt ontroPl unchThrough49 - 50 FullOSD 20 , 40 VolumePunct > Through4 _ 49 FullOSDTimeOut 40 ZoneII 15 HallMode 23 , 34 SafeS / Informatio4n SatelliteTelevision16 Headphones7 , 33 InputSetup20 22 SemiOSD 20,3940 Installation16 18 SettingPresetStallons37 InstalhtionLocation4 SleepMode 13,32 IRReceiver6 , 17 SourceSebcllon 6 , 12 , 15 , 20 21,32 Logic7 23,34 SpeakePr lacement19 ManuaMl odeTuning6 , 12 - 13 , 37 SpeakePr olarity16
Page: 57

NOTES
Page: 58

NOTES
Page: 59

NOTES
Page: 60

250 C _ osswaysParkDrive , Woodbu % NewYork11797 / _ / wwharmankardocnom © 2005 HarmanInternationaIlndustriesI , ncorporated harman / kardon _ PartNo ZKD1101HAO03
Search in Receiver on ebay
"